Home
        2002 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner`s Manual
         Contents
1.       2002 Pontiac Grand Prix  Owner   s Manual    Litho in U S A    Copyright General Motors Corporation 06 13 01  Part Number 10315402 A First Edition All Rights Reserved    PONTIAC       GENERAL MOTORS  GM  the GM Emblem   PONTIAC  the PONTIAC Emblem and the name  GRAND PRIX are registered trademarks of General  Motors Corporation     This manual includes the latest information at the time  it was printed  We reserve the right to make changes  after that time without further notice  For vehicles first  sold in Canada  substitute the name    General Motors  of Canada Limited    for Pontiac Division whenever it  appears in this manual     Please keep this manual in your vehicle  so it will  be there if you ever need it when you    re on the road   If you sell the vehicle  please leave this manual in it  so the new owner can use it     ii       a N We support voluntary  technician certification     CERTIFIED       WE SUPPORT  VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN  CERTIFICATION THROUGH    National Institute for  AUTOMOTIVE  SERVICE  EXCELLENCE    i J             For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a  French Language Manual     Aux propri  taires canadiens  Vous pouvez vous  procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fran  ais chez  votre concessionaire ou au     Helm  Incorporated  P O  Box 07130  Detroit  MI 48207    How to Use this Manual    Many people read their owner   s manual from beginning  to end when they first receive their new vehicle  If you  do this  it will help you learn about the featu
2.       To check the parking brake   s holding ability  With  the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL  N    slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake  pedal  Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking  brake only       To check the PARK  P  mechanism   s holding  ability  With the engine running  shift to PARK  P    Then release the parking brake followed by the  regular brake     Underbody Flushing Service    At least every spring  use plain water to flush any  corrosive materials from the underbody  Take care to  clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris  can collect     Part C  Periodic  Maintenance Inspections    Listed in this part are inspections and services which  should be performed at least twice a year  for instance   each spring and fall   You should let your dealer    s  service department or other qualified service center  do these jobs  Make sure any necessary repairs are  completed at once     Proper procedures to perform these services may be  found in a service manual  See    Service and Owner  Publications    in the Index     Steering  Suspension and Front Drive Axle  Boot and Seal Inspection    Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering  system for damaged  loose or missing parts  signs of  wear or lack of lubrication  Inspect the power steering  lines and hoses for proper hook up  binding  leaks   cracks  chafing  etc  Clean and then inspect the drive  axle boot seals for damage  tears or leakage  Replace  seals if nec
3.      BRAKES    FUSE  BOX  ACCESS    ENGINE  COOLANT    OWNER   S  MANUAL    SERVICE    SERVICE  MANUAL        gt        y Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems       Here yov   ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly  You can also  learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts     1 2 Seats and Controls   1 7 Safety Belts  They   re for Everyone   1 1 Questions Many People Ask About  Safety Belts    and the Answers    N    1 13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  1 13 Driver Position   1 20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  1 21 Right Front Passenger Position   1 21 Supplemental Restraint System  SRS   1 28 Rear Seat Passengers    1 31    Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for  Children and Small Adults   Center Passenger Position   Children   Restraint Systems for Children   Older Children   Safety Belt Extender   Checking Your Restraint Systems   Replacing Restraint System Parts  After a Crash    Seats and Seat Controls    This section tells you how to adjust the seats and  explains reclining seatbacks and head restraints     Manual Front Seat    You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to  adjust a manual driver   s seat while the vehicle is    moving  The sudden movement could startle and  confuse you  or make you push a pedal when you  don   t want to  Adjust the driver   s seat only when  the vehicle is not moving           Lift the lever  located under the front of the seat  using a  twi
4.      Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds   There just isn   t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning   The best advice is to slow down when it is raining     4 22    Driving Through Deep Standing Water    NOTICE     If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or  standing water  water can come in through your  engine   s air intake and badly damage your  engine  Never drive through water that is slightly  lower than the underbody of your vehicle  If you  can   t avoid deep puddles or standing water  drive  through them very slowly        Driving Through Flowing Water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips      Besides slowing down  allow some extra following  distance  And be especially careful when you pass  another vehicle  Allow yourself more clear room  ahead  and be prepared to have your view restricted   Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces  by road spray     If you try to drive through flowing water  as you    Have good tires with proper tread depth  See    Tires     might at a low water crossing  your vehicle can be in the Index     carried away  As little as six inches of flowing  water can carry away a smaller vehicle  If this  happens  you and other vehicle occupants could  drown  Don   t ignore police warning signs  and  otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive  through flowing water        4 23    City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the  amount of traffic on them  You   ll want to watch out for  what the other drive
5.      The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands  of revolutions per minute  rpm      NOTICE     Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in  the shaded area  or engine damage may occur        2 77    Warning Lights  Gages  and Indicators    This part describes the warning lights and gages that  may be on your vehicle  The pictures will help you  locate them     Warning lights and gages can signal that something is  wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an  expensive repair or replacement  Paying attention to  your warning lights and gages could also save you or  others from injury     Warning lights come on when there may be or is a  problem with one of your vehicle   s functions  As you  will see in the details on the next few pages  some  warning lights come on briefly when you start the  engine just to let you know they   re working  If you are  familiar with this section  you should not be alarmed  when this happens     Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem  with one of your vehicle   s functions  Often gages and  warning lights work together to let you know when  there   s a problem with your vehicle     2 78    When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on  when you are driving  or when one of the gages shows  there may be a problem  check the section that tells you  what to do about it  Please follow this manual   s advice   Waiting to do repairs can be costly    and even  dangerous  So please get to know your warning lig
6.      The traction you can get in a curve depends on the  condition of your tires and the road surface  the angle  at which the curve is banked  and your speed  While  you   re in a curve  speed is the one factor you   can control     Suppose you   re steering through a sharp curve    Then you suddenly accelerate  Both control   systems    steering and acceleration    have to   do their work where the tires meet the road  Adding   the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those  places  You can lose control  Refer to    Traction Control  System    or    Enhanced Traction System    in the Index     What should you do if this ever happens  Ease up on the  accelerator pedal  steer the vehicle the way you want it  to go  and slow down     Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should  adjust your speed  Of course  the posted speeds are  based on good weather and road conditions  Under less  favorable conditions you    ll want to go slower     If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a  curve  do it before you enter the curve  while your front  wheels are straight ahead     Try to adjust your speed so you can    drive    through the  curve  Maintain a reasonable  steady speed  Wait to  accelerate until you are out of the curve  and then  accelerate gently into the straightaway     4 13    Steering in Emergencies    There are times when steering can be more effective  than braking  For example  you come over a hill and  find a truck stopped in your lane  or a car s
7.      ay    OQ        9  Reinstall the wheel trim  If the vehicle has plastic  caps tighten them by hand  With a wheel wrench   tighten the plastic caps an additional quarter  turn clockwise        7  Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle  counterclockwise  Lower the jack completely     5 33    Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened  wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose    and even come off  This could lead to an accident     Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts  If you have  to replace them  be sure to get new GM original  equipment wheel nuts     Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have  the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to  100 1b ft   140 N m      5 34       NOTICE     Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to  brake pulsation and rotor damage  To avoid  expensive brake repairs  evenly tighten the wheel  nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper  torque specification        10  Don   t try to put the wheel cover on your compact  spare tire  It won   t fit  Store the wheel cover in the  trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced     NOTICE     Wheel covers won   t fit on your compact spare    tire  If you try to put a wheel cover on your  compact spare tire you could damage the cover  or the compact spare tire        Storing the Flat Tire and Tools    Storing a jack  a tire or other equipment in the    passenger compartment of the vehicle could  cause injury  In a sudden stop or collision  loose  equipment could strike some
8.     1  Turn the radio on     Press AM FM to select the band     Tune in the desired station     eey    Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons  until SET appears on the display  Whenever you  press that numbered pushbutton  the station you set  will return     5  Repeat the steps for each pushbutton     3 13    Setting the Tone  Bass Treble     Equalizer  A seven band equalizer is part of your audio  system  Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce  frequency range     Adjusting the Speakers  Balance Fade     BAL  Balance   Press this knob lightly so it extends   Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers   The middle position balances the sound between   the speakers     FADE  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn it to  move the sound to the front or rear speakers  The middle  position balances the sound between the speakers     Press these knobs back into their stored positions when  you    re not using them     Playing a Compact Disc    Insert a disc partway into the slot  label side up  The  player will pull it in  The compact disc symbol will  appear on the display  If the ignition and the radio are  on  the disc will begin playing  CD will appear on the  display next to the compact disc symbol  If you want to  insert a disc when the ignition is off  first press the  EJECT button     3 14    The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single  discs  Full size compact discs and the smaller discs are  loaded in the same manner     
9.     2 10    Changes or modifications to this system by other than an  authorized service facility could void authorization to  use this equipment     At times you may notice a decrease in range  This is  normal for any remote keyless entry system  If the  transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer  to your vehicle for the transmitter to work  try this       Check the distance  You may be too far from your  vehicle  You may need to stand closer during rainy  or snowy weather       Check the location  Other vehicles or objects may be  blocking the signal  Take a few steps to the left or  right  hold the transmitter higher  and try again       Check to determine if battery replacement is  necessary  See the instructions that follow        If you   re still having trouble  see your dealer or a  qualified technician for service     Operation             Three Button Key Fob Four Button Key Fob    Remote All Door Lock    LOCK  To lock all the doors  press LOCK on the  remote keyless entry transmitter  See    Power Door  Locks    in the Index for more details on power door lock  features  If your vehicle is equipped with the content  theft deterrent system  the LOCK button may arm the  system  See    Content Theft Deterrent    in the Index for  more details     Remote Driver   s Door and All Door Unlock    UNLOCK  When you press UNLOCK on the remote  keyless entry transmitter  only the driver   s door will  unlock  If you press UNLOCK again within five  seconds  all th
10.     Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you  would when driving your vehicle without a trailer  This  can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking  and sudden turns     Passing    You ll need more passing distance up ahead when  you   re towing a trailer  And  because you   re a good deal  longer  you    ll need to go much farther beyond the  passed vehicle before you can return to your lane     4 41    Backing Up    Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand   Then  to move the trailer to the left  just move that hand  to the left  To move the trailer to the right  move your  hand to the right  Always back up slowly and  if  possible  have someone guide you     Making Turns    NOTICE     Making very sharp turns while trailering could    cause the trailer to come in contact with the  vehicle  Your vehicle could be damaged  Avoid  making very sharp turns while trailering        When you   re turning with a trailer  make wider turns  than normal  Do this so your trailer won   t strike   soft shoulders  curbs  road signs  trees or other  objects  Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers  Signal well  in advance     4 42    Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer    When you tow a trailer  your vehicle may need a  different turn signal flasher and or extra wiring  Check  with your dealer  The arrows on your instrument panel  will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change   Properly hooked up  the trailer lamps will also flash   telling other driver
11.     Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check    Check the windshield washer fluid level in the  windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if  necessary  See    Windshield Washer Fluid    in the  Index for further details     At Least Once a Month  Tire Inflation Check    Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures   Don   t forget to check your spare tire  See    Tires     in the Index for further details     Cassette Deck Service    Clean cassette deck  Cleaning should be done every  50 hours of tape play  See    Audio Systems    in the  Index for further details     7 15    At Least Twice a Year    Restraint System Check    Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your  belts  buckles  latch plates  retractors and anchorages are  working properly  Look for any other loose or damaged  safety belt system parts  If you see anything that might  keep a safety belt system from doing its job  have it  repaired  Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced     Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings   and have them repaired or replaced   The air bag system  does not need regular maintenance      Wiper Blade Check    Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking  Replace blade  inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or  miss areas of the windshield  Also see    Wiper Blades   Cleaning    in the Index     Weatherstrip Lubrication    Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  longer  seal better  and not stick or squeak  Apply  silic
12.     in the Index  Poor fuel quality will cause your  engine not to run as efficiently as designed  You may  notice this as stalling after start up  stalling when you put  the vehicle into gear  misfiring  hesitation on acceleration  or stumbling on acceleration   These conditions may go  away once the engine is warmed up   This will be  detected by the system and cause the light to turn on     If you experience one or more of these conditions   change the fuel brand you use  It will require at least one  full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off     If none of the above steps have made the light turn off   have your dealer or qualified service center check the  vehicle  Your dealer has the proper test equipment and  diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical  problems that may have developed     Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs    Some state provincial and local governments have or  may begin programs to inspect the emission control  equipment on your vehicle  Failure to pass this  inspection could prevent you from getting a   vehicle registration     Here are some things you need to know in order to help  your vehicle pass an inspection     Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the  SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is  on or not working properly     Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD   on board diagnostic  system determines that critical  emission control systems have not been completely  diagnosed by the sy
13.    1  this device may not cause harmful interference   and  2  this device must accept any interference  received  including interference that may cause  undesired operation     2 30    This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada   Operation is subject to the following two conditions     1  this device may not cause interference  and  2  this  device must accept any interference received  including  interference that may cause undesired operation of   the device     Changes or modifications to this system by other than an  authorized service facility could void authorization to  use this equipment     PASS Key III uses a radio frequency transponder in the  key that matches a decoder in your vehicle     When the PASS Key III system senses that someone is  using the wrong key  it shuts down the vehicle   s starter  and fuel systems  The starter will not work and fuel will  stop being delivered to the engine  Anyone using a  trial and error method to start the vehicle will be  discouraged because of the high number of electrical  key codes     When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not  start and the SECURITY light comes on  the key may  have a damaged transponder  Turn the ignition off and  try again     If the engine still does not start  and the key appears to  be undamaged  try another ignition key  At this time   you may also want to check the fuse  see    Fuses and  Circuit Breakers    in the Index   If the engine still does  not start with the other 
14.    Fuse  BLANK  BLANK  BLANK  BLANK  BTSI    BLANK  BLANK  BLANK  HVAC CTRL  DIC HVAC    BLANK  BLANK  PWR DROP    CANISTER  VENT    DRL    Description  Blank  Blank  Blank  Blank    Automatic Transaxle Shift  Lock Control    Blank  Blank  Blank  Blower Control  HVAC    Rear Defog  HVAC  Driver  Information Center  Daytime  Running Lamps  Heated Seats    Blank  Blank  Power Drop Ignition    Canister Vent Solenoid    Daytime Running Lamps    6 71    Underhood Fuse Block                                                                E g   Some fuses are located in a i   m  _   fuse block in the engine i a aD  compartment on the   n      ry 26  passenger   s side  Pull off   7   the cover labeled FUSES to wo  5 O 16 O                               expose the fuses                                                           6 M4 40 17  7 12   48 BH G amp  35 36  8 37 kE E                       e                          Fuse Description  1 Cooling Fan 2  2 Spare  3 Headlamps  4 Battery Main 2  5 Ignition Main 1    6 72    Fuse    18  19  20  21    22  23  24  25  26  27  28    Description  Cooling Fan 1  Battery Main 1  Ignition Main 2  Fuel Injections  Spare   Spare    Mass Air Flow  MAF    Heated Sensors  Canister Purge   Boost Solenoid    Spare   Spare   Spare   Ignition Module   Spare   Trunk Release  Back Up Lamps  AC Clutch  ABS Ignition    Fuse  29    30  31  32  33    34  35  36  37    38  39  40    Description    Remote Keyless Entry   Theft Deterrent  Trip Computer   HVAC
15.    RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS    FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING  SELECT THE LOWEST  SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE     HOT FOR THIS  WEATHER SYMBOL    SAE 10w 30    SAE 5W 30  PREFERRED    COLD  WEATHER    DO NOT USE SAE 20W  50 OR ANY OTHER  GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED       3100 V6 Engine    As in the chart shown previously  if you have the  3100 V6 engine  SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle   However  you can use SAE 10W 30 if it   s going to be  0  F   18  C  or above  These numbers on an oil  container show its viscosity  or thickness  Do not use  other viscosity oils  such as SAE 20W 50     As shown in the following chart  if you have the    3800 V6 engine  SAE 10W 30 is best for your vehicle     However  you can use SAE 5W 30 if it   s going to be  colder than 60  F  16  C  before your next oil change   When it   s very cold  you should use SAE 5W 30   These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity   or thickness  Do not use other viscosity oils  such   as SAE 20W 50     RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS       FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING  SELECT THE LOWEST  SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE        HOT  WEATHER    T SAE 10W 30  PREFERRED          SAE 5W 30          COLD  WEATHER    DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER  GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED       3800 V6 or 3800 V6 Supercharged Engine  6 17    NOTICE     Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum    Institute 
16.    into the ashtrays  If you do  cigarettes or other To block out glare  you can swing down the visors   smoking materials could set them on fire  You can also swing them from front to side   causing damage        Visor Vanity Mirrors    Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror  If the  vehicle has the optional lighted vanity mirrors  the  lamps come on when you open the cover     To use the lighter  located inside the center front ashtray   push it in all the way and let go  When it   s ready  it will  pop back out by itself     2 67    Accessory Power Outlet    Your vehicle has a 12 volt outlet which can be used to  plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone   a compact disc player  etc  It is located on the  passenger   s side  near the floor     Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet  When  not using the outlet  be sure to cover it with the  protective cap     The accessory power outlet will only operate while the  ignition is on and for a few minutes after turning the  ignition off  If you would like to operate an accessory  for an extended period of time  see your dealer for  more information     NOTICE     When using accessory power outlets       Maximum load of any outlet should not  exceed the fuse rating       Be sure to turn off electrical equipment  when not in use  Leaving electrical  equipment on for extended periods can  drain the battery     2 68       Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the  accessory power outlet and
17.    oil  coolant  brake fluid  windshield washer and  other fluids  and plastic or rubber  You or others  could be burned  Be careful not to drop or spill  things that will burn onto a hot engine        Hood Release  To open the hood do the following     1  Pull the handle located  inside the vehicle near  the parking brake           2  Next  go to the front of the vehicle and release the  secondary hood latch     3  Lift the hood     When you open the hood of a vehicle with a 3100 V6  Code J  engine  you   ll see        A  Windshield Washer Fluid E  Engine Coolant Recovery Tank I  Automatic Transaxle  B  Battery F  Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Fluid Dipstick  C  Underhood Fuse Block G  Engine Oil Fill Cap J  Brake Fluid Reservoir    D  Radiator Fill Cap H  Engine Oil Dipstick K  Engine Air Cleaner Filter       A  Windshield Washer Fluid F  Power Steering Fluid Reservoir  B  Battery  low in engine compartment   C  Underhood Fuse Block G  Engine Oil Dipstick   D  Radiator Fill Cap H  Engine Oil Fill Cap    E  Engine Coolant Recovery Tank    I  Automatic Transaxle  Fluid Dipstick    J  Brake Fluid Reservoir  K  Engine Air Cleaner Filter    When you open the hood of a vehicle with a 3800 V6 Supercharged  Code 1  engine  you   ll see        A  Windshield Washer Fluid F  Power Steering Fluid Reservoir I  Automatic Transaxle   B  Battery  low in engine compartment  Fluid Dipstick   C  Underhood Fuse Block G  Engine Oil Dipstick J  Brake Fluid Reservoir   D  Radiator Fill Cap H  En
18.    or different    Your vehicle gets rusty underneath    Your vehicle was damaged in a collision   Your vehicle was damaged when driving over  high points on the road or over road debris   Repairs weren   t done correctly    Your vehicle or exhaust system had been  modified improperly     If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into  your vehicle       Drive it only with all the windows down to  blow out any CO  and    Have your vehicle fixed immediately        2 47    Running Your Engine While  You   re Parked    It   s better not to park with the engine running  But if you  ever have to  here are some things to know     Idling the engine with the climate control  system off could allow dangerous exhaust into  your vehicle  See the earlier Caution under     Engine Exhaust       Also  idling in a closed in place can let deadly  carbon monoxide  CO  into your vehicle even  if the fan is at the highest setting  One place  this can happen is a garage  Exhaust    with  CO    can come in easily  NEVER park ina  garage with the engine running     Another closed in place can be a blizzard   See    Blizzard    in the Index     2 48       It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if  the shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with the  parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll   Don   t leave your vehicle when the engine is    running unless you have to  If you   ve left the  engine running  the vehicle can move suddenly   You or others could be injured  To be sure your  vehicl
19.   Rear Assist Handle Reading  Lamps  Option     There is a reading lamp provided in each rear assist  handle  Use the button next to each lamp to turn it on  and off     2 59    Battery Saver    Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from  draining the battery in case you accidentally leave the  interior  trunk or underhood lamps on  If you leave   any of these lamps on while the ignition is in LOCK or  OFF  they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes   The lamps won   t come back on again until you do   one of the following        Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY     e  Turn the interior lamp thumbwheel completely to the  right  then back slightly to the left       Open  or close and reopen  a door that is closed     If the vehicle has less than 15 miles  25 km  on the  odometer  the battery saver will turn off the lamps after  only three minutes     2 60    Mirrors    Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when you  are sitting in a comfortable driving position     Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror    To reduce glare from lamps behind you  pull the lever  located in the center of the bottom of the mirror toward  you to the night position  To return the mirror back to  the day position  push the lever away from you     Electrochromic Day Night Rearview  Mirror with Compass and Temperature  Display  Option    Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview  mirror with a compass and temperature display     When turned on  an electrochromic mirror 
20.   The fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have  left when the ignition is on  When the indicator nears  empty  you still have a little fuel left  but you should get  more soon     Here are four things owners usually ask about the fuel  gage  All these situations are normal and do not indicate  a problem with the fuel gage        At the gas station  the pump shuts off before the gage  reads full     2 90      It takes more  or less  fuel to fill up than the gage  indicates  For example  the gage reads half full  but it  took more  or less  than half the tank   s capacity to  fill it       The gage pointer may move while cornering  braking  or speeding up       The gage may not indicate full when the ignition is  turned off     Low Fuel Warning Light    If your fuel is low  the  warning light near the fuel  gage will go on     LOW  FUEL    It will also come on for a few seconds when you first  turn on the ignition as a check to show you it   s working  properly  If it doesn   t come on then  see your dealer   for service     Driver Information Center  DIC                    3100 V6 or 3800 V6 Engine Only    The Driver Information Center  DIC  gives you important safety and maintenance facts  When you turn the ignition  on  all of the DIC lights illuminate for a few seconds  After this  the DIC will begin working     2 91    Functions        _4t t      Door Ajar   If one of the doors is ajar  this  light will appear next to that door on the vehicle outline     CHANGE OIL
21.   Traction  or TCS  Traction Control System    If the vehicle has the enhanced traction system  3100 or  3800 V6 engine  or the traction control system    3800 supercharged V6 engine   you will have a disable  button on the far right side of the trip computer  The  enhanced traction system and traction control system are  automatically activated when you turn the ignition on   This button will activate deactivate the system  If you  need to disable the system  such as when you are stuck  and are rocking the vehicle back and forth  push this  button  See    Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow    in   the Index     2 96       Head Up Display  HUD   Option     If the HUD image is too bright  or too high in    your field of view  it may take you more time to  see things you need to see when it   s dark outside   Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed  low in your field of view        If you have the Head Up  Display  HUD   you can  see the speedometer reading   in English or metric units   and a brief display of the  current radio station or CD  track  displayed    through     the windshield     When you sit up straight in your seat  the HUD image  will appear straight ahead near the front bumper     The HUD also shows the following lights when they are  lit on the instrument panel cluster        Turn Signal Indicators     High Beam Indicator Symbol    Low Fuel Symbol    The HUD will display CHECK GAGES when the  following items are lit on the instrument panel cluster       Oi
22.   Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during  severe operating conditions  See    Engine Overheating     in the Index     y Section 5 Problems on the Road       Here you   ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road     5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 14 Cooling System   5 3 Other Warning Devices 5 25 If A Tire Goes Flat   5 3 Jump Starting 5 26 Changing a Flat Tire   5 10 Towing Your Vehicle 5 37 Compact Spare Tire   5 11 Engine Overheating 5 38 If Your Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow    5 1    The hazard warning flasher  button is located on top of  the steering column     Hazard Warning Flashers       The hazard warning flashers work no matter what  position your key is in  and even if the key isn   t in     Press the button to make your front and rear turn signal  lamps flash on and off  Press the button again to turn the  flashers off     When the hazard warning flashers are on  your turn  Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others  They signals and brake lamps won   t work   also let police know you have a problem  Your front and  rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off        Other Warning Devices    If you carry reflective triangles  you can set one up at  the side of the road about 300 feet  100 m  behind  your vehicle     NOTICE     Ignoring these steps could result in costly  damage to your vehicle that wouldn   t be covered    J ump Starting by your warranty    If your battery has run down  you may want to use The ACDelco  
23.   and both your vehicle and the trailer  can be damaged        But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill  here   s  how to do it     1  Apply your regular brakes  but don   t shift into  PARK  P  yet     2  Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels     3  When the wheel chocks are in place  release the  regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load     4  Reapply the regular brakes  Then apply your parking  brake  and then shift to PARK  P      5  Release the regular brakes     4 43    When You Are Ready to Leave After  Parking on a Hill    1  Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down  while you        start your engine       shift into a gear  and     release the parking brake   2  Let up on the brake pedal     3  Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks     4  Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks     4 44    Maintenance When Trailer Towing    Your vehicle will need service more often when you    re  pulling a trailer  See the Maintenance Schedule for more  on this  Things that are especially important in trailer  operation are automatic transaxle fluid  don   t overfill    engine oil  drive belts  cooling system and brake system   Each of these is covered in this manual  and the Index  will help you find them quickly  If you   re trailering  it   s  a good idea to review this information before you start  your trip     Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts  are tight   Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing  
24.   end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part     1 29        lt           IG  4       E                  E   EAE         X                J   K    Ke  Hie  YS                i      n y  H 4             1 30       The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  the hips  just touching the thighs  In a crash  this applies  force to the strong pelvic bones  And yov    d be less  likely to slide under the lap belt  If you slid under it    the belt would apply force at your abdomen  This could  cause serious or even fatal injuries  The shoulder belt  should go over the shoulder and across the chest    These parts of the body are best able to take belt  restraining forces     The safety belt locks if there   s a sudden stop or a crash   or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor     You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is    too loose  In a crash  you would move forward  too much  which could increase injury  The  shoulder belt should fit against your body           To unlatch the belt  just push the button on the buckle     Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides  for Children and Small Adults    Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide   added safety belt comfort for older children who  have outgrown booster seats and for small adults   When installed on a shoulder belt  the comfort guide  better positions the belt away from the neck and head     There is one guide for each outside passenger position in  the rear seat  To provide added sa
25.   five day  maximum  may be available  Claim amounts should  reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts     Courtesy Rental Vehicle    When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight  warranty repairs  your dealer may arrange to provide  you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for  a rental vehicle you obtained  at actual cost  up to a  maximum of  30 00 per day supported by receipts    This requires that you sign and complete a rental  agreement and meet state  local and rental vehicle  provider requirements  Requirements vary and may  include minimum age requirements  insurance coverage   credit card  etc  You are responsible for fuel usage  charges and may also be responsible for taxes  levies   usage fees  excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the  completion of the repair     Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as  a courtesy rental     Additional Program Information    Courtesy Transportation is available during the  Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period    but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty   A separate booklet entitled    Warranty and Owner  Assistance Information    furnished with each new  vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information     Courtesy Transportation is available only at  participating dealers and all program options  such as  shuttle service  may not be available at every dealer   Please contact your dealer for specific information about  availability  All Courtesy Tra
26.   peal Release Pawl  Oil    in the Index   Hood and Multi Purpose Lubricant     Door Hinges Superlube    GM Part  No  12346241 or equivalent      Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease  Conditioning  GM Part No  12345579  or equivalent         7 22    Part E  Maintenance Record    After the scheduled services are performed  record the date  odometer reading and who performed the service in the  boxes provided after the maintenance interval  Any additional information from    Owner Checks and Services    or     Periodic Maintenance    can be added on the following record pages  Also  you should retain all maintenance receipts   Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them     Maintenance Record  ODOMETER  DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED       7 23    Maintenance Record    ODOMETER  DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED       y Section 8 Customer Assistance Information       Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you need assistance  This section also tells you how to obtain service  publications and how to report any safety defects     8 2 Pontiac Cares 8 8 Canadian Roadside Assistance   8 2 What Makes Up Pontiac Cares  8 8 Courtesy Transportation   8 3 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 10 Warranty Information   8 5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United   TTY  Users States Government   8 5 Customer Assistance Offices 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to the   8 6 GM Mobility Pro
27.   people riding in these areas are more likely to be    seriously injured or killed  Do not allow people to  ride in any area of your vehicle that is not  equipped with seats and safety belts  Be sure  everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a  safety belt properly        Your vehicle has a light  that comes on as a reminder  to buckle up  See    Safety  Belt Reminder Light    in  the Index        In most states and Canadian provinces  the law says to  wear safety belts  Here   s why  They work     You never know if you   ll be in a crash  If you do have  a crash  you don   t know if it will be a bad one     A few crashes are mild  and some crashes can be so  serious that even buckled up a person wouldn   t survive   But most crashes are in between  In many of them   people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk  away  Without belts they could have been badly hurt   or killed     After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles   the facts are clear  In most crashes buckling up does  matter     a lot     When you ride in or on anything  you go as fast as  it goes        Put someone on it        Take the simplest vehicle  Suppose it   s just a seat on wheels        Get it up to speed  Then stop the vehicle  The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something   doesn   t stop     In a real vehicle  it could be the windshield        or the instrument panel           or the safety belts     With safety belts  you slow down as the vehicle does   You get m
28.   theft deterrent system is always disarmed     Mode 4  Not Used    2 21    Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory  it was Arming and Disarming the Content    programmed to Mode 2  The mode to which your Theft Deterrent System  If Equipped   vehicle was programmed may have been changed since f   it left the factory  To determine the mode to which your To arm and disarm the content theft deterrent system   vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a the system must be turned on by using Mode 2 listed  different mode  do the following  previously in this section under    Content    Theft Deterrent System        1  Follow the instructions for    Entering Programming    Mode    listed previously  _   arming and disarming feature  you can do  the following     2  Turn the parking lamps on  then off     e  3  Count the number of chimes you hear  The number  of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for   If you do not wish to change the current mode  you  can either exit the programming mode by following s  the instructions earlier in this section or program the  next feature available on your vehicle   e    4  Turn the parking lamps on  then off again to change  the current mode     5  Repeat Step 4 until you hear the number of chimes  that matches the number of the mode you want     The mode you selected is now set  You can either exit  the programming mode by following the instructions  earlier in this section or program the next feature  available on
29.   use a cloth or a paper towel to do this  but be  sure to use a scraper or wire brush later  if you  need to  to get all the rust or dirt off  See     Changing a Flat Tire    in the Index        6 51    When It   s Time for New Tires       6 52    One way to tell when it   s  time for new tires is to  check the treadwear  indicators  which will  appear when your tires have  only 1 16 inch  1 6 mm  or  less of tread remaining     You need a new tire if any of the following statements  are true     You can see the indicators at three or more places  around the tire     You can see cord or fabric showing through the  tire   s rubber     The tread or sidewall is cracked  cut or snagged deep  enough to show cord or fabric     The tire has a bump  bulge or split     The tire has a puncture  cut or other damage that  can   t be repaired well because of the size or location  of the damage     Buying New Tires    To find out what kind and size of tires you need  look at  the Tire Loading Information label     The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had  a Tire Performance Criteria Specification  TPC Spec   number on each tire   s sidewall  When you get new tires   get ones with that same TPC Spec number  That way  your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed  to give proper endurance  handling  speed rating   traction  ride and other things during normal service on  your vehicle  If your tires have an all season tread  design  the TPC number will be followed
30.   y Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems       In this section  you    ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle   Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle     3 2 Comfort Controls 3 13  3 2 Dual Climate Control System  3 4 Rear Window Defogger 3 15  3 5 Ventilation System 3 18  3 5 Audio Systems 3 19  3 6 Setting the Clock 3 19  3 6 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 3 20  3 10 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc 3 21  Player  Option  3 21  3 21    AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and  Equalizer  If Equipped    Theft Deterrent Feature   Audio Steering Wheel Controls  If Equipped   Understanding Radio Reception   Tips About Your Audio System   Care of Your Cassette Tape Player   Care of Your Compact Discs   Care of Your Compact Disc Player   Backglass Antenna    Comfort Controls    Dual Climate Control System       This system allows the driver and passenger to maintain  separate temperature settings  The system works best if  you keep the windows closed while using it     Fan Knob    The knob on the left side of the climate control panel  regulates the fan speed  To turn the fan off  turn the  knob to OFF  The fan must be on for the air  conditioning compressor to operate     Driver   s Temperature Lever    The lever on the left adjusts the air temperature on the  driver   s side of the vehicle only  The passenger   s side  has its own lever for temperature control  Slide the lever  u
31.  A shelf  or armrest type  shield has straps that are attached to a wide   shelf like shield that swings up or to the side     When choosing a child restraint  be sure the child  restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle  If it is   it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor  vehicle safety standards     Then follow the instructions for the restraint  You may  find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a  booklet  or both  These restraints use the belt system in  your vehicle  but the child also has to be secured within  the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury   When securing an add on child restraint  refer to the  instructions that come with the restraint which may be  on the restraint itself or in a booklet  or both  and to this  manual  The child restraint instructions are important   so if they are not available  obtain a replacement copy  from the manufacturer     1 41    Where to Put the Restraint    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat   General Motors  therefore  recommends that child  restraints be secured in the rear seat including an infant  riding in a rear facing infant seat  a child riding in a  forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a  booster seat  Never put a rear facing child restraint in  the front passenger seat  Here   s why     A child in a rear facing child restraint can be  seriously injured or killed if the right f
32.  Automatic Door Locking  Shift out of PARK  P   with the ignition on and the driver   s door closed  all  doors will lock automatically     Mode 3  Automatic Unlocking with the Ignition Off      Automatic Door Unlocking  Turn off the ignition  with the transaxle in PARK  P  and all doors will  unlock automatically        Automatic Door Locking  Shift out of PARK  P   with the ignition on and the driver   s door closed and  all doors will lock automatically     Mode 4  Automatic Unlocking and Locking with  Transaxle in PARK  P       Automatic Door Unlocking  Shift into  PARK  P  with the ignition on and all doors  will unlock automatically        Automatic Door Locking  Shift out of PARK  P   with the ignition on and the driver   s door closed and  all doors will lock automatically     Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory  it was  programmed to Mode 3  The mode to which your  vehicle was programmed may have been changed since  it left the factory  To determine the mode to which your  vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a  different mode  do the following     1  Follow the instructions for    Entering Programming  Mode    listed previously     2  Press LOCK on the power door lock switch     3  Count the number of chimes you hear  The number  of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set  for  If you do not wish to change the current mode   you can either exit the programming mode by  following the instructions earlier in this section or  program
33.  Canada  the law requires that forward facing   child restraints have a top strap  and that the strap be  anchored  In the United States  some child restraints also  have a top strap  If your child restraint has a top strap    it should be anchored     Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor  points  Be sure to use an anchor point located on the  same side of the vehicle as the seating position where  the child restraint will be placed     Once you have the top strap anchored  you    ll be ready  to secure the child restraint itself  Tighten the top  strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer   s  instructions say     Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for  the rear seating positions  You ll find them behind the  rear seat on the filler panel        1 43    Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear  Outside Seat Position    ay               7     You    ll be using the lap shoulder belt  See the earlier  part about the top strap if the child restraint has one   Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the  child restraint  Secure the child in the child restraint  when and as the instructions say     1  Put the restraint on the seat     2  Pick up the latch plate  and run the lap and shoulder  portions of the vehicle   s safety belt through or  around the restraint  The child restraint instructions  will show you how     If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child   s face  or neck  put it behind the child restraint     1 44       
34.  Module  Security LED    Alt Sense  Torque Converter Clutch  TCC   Fuel Pump    Electronic Control  Module Powertrain  Control Module    Spare  Fog Lamps  Horn    Chime Mall Module  Taillamps   Parking Lamps  Sidemarker  Lamps  Dimmable Lamps    Spare Fuse  Air Pump  Mini Fuse Puller    6 73    Diode Description  Air Conditioning Clutch Diode  Relay Description  9 Cooling Fan  10 Cooling Fan 2  11 Ignition Main  12 Cooling Fan 1  13 Air Conditioning Clutch  14 Fuel Pump  15 Spare  16 Horn  17 Fog Lamp  Replacement Bulbs  For any bulb not listed here  contact your dealer   Lamps Bulb Number  Back Up iecere e ee wae ae 3057  Center High Mounted Stop  CHMSL          1141  Front Parking Turn Signal                  3357A  Headlamps High Low Beam                 9007  Tail Stop Turn Signal                       3057  Sidemarker  Front and Rear                   194    6 74    Capacities and Specifications    Please refer to    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants     in the Index for more information     Automatic Transaxle with Overdrive   Pan Removal and Replacement     7 4 quarts  7 0 L   After Complete Overhaul        10 0 quarts  9 5 L   When draining replacing converter or auxiliary cooler   more fluid may be needed    Cooling System Including Reservoir   3100 V6  Code J                11 0 quarts  10 4 L   3800 V6  Code K               11 2 quarts  10 6 L   3800 V6 Supercharged  Code 1    11 2 quarts  10 6 L   Engine Oil with Filter    3100 V6  Code J                 4 3 quart
35.  NOTICE  Compartment Overview    in the Index for more  information on location   Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure  You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the    Failure to follow this procedure could cause your cooling system  including the radiator pressure cap and  engine to overheat and be severely damaged  upper radiator hose  is no longer hot        1  Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until  it first stops   Don   t press down while turning the  pressure cap      If you hear a hiss  wait for that to stop  A hiss means  there is still some pressure left        5 19    You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot    engine parts  Coolant contains ethylene glycol  and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  enough  Don   t spill coolant on a hot engine        3  If you have the 3800 V6 engine  remove the  3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield to access  the bleed valve        2  Then keep turning the pressure cap  but now push  down as you turn it  Remove the pressure cap     5 20    4  After the engine cools  open the coolant air bleed  valve or valves        Thermostat Housing Thermostat Bypass    A  Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube and cap  3100 V6  Tube  3100 V6     before removing  Twist the oil fill tube  with cap  attached  counterclockwise and remove it     3100 V6 engine  There are two bleed valves  One is  located on the thermostat housing  The other is  located on the thermostat bypass tube     B  If you hav
36.  P      See    Shifting Into PARK  P     in the Index     If you   re pulling a trailer  see    Towing a Trailer     in the Index     2 40       Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK  P  before  starting the engine  The vehicle has an automatic  transaxle shift lock control system  You must fully apply  the regular brakes and press the shift control button  located on the front of the shift lever  before you can  shift from PARK  P  when the ignition is in RUN  If you  cannot shift out of PARK  P   ease pressure on the shift  lever by pushing it all the way into PARK  P  while  keeping the brake pedal pushed down  Release the shift  lever button  Then move the shift lever out of PARK  P    being sure to press the shift lever button  See    Shifting  Out of PARK  P     in the Index     REVERSE  R   Use this gear to back up     NOTICE     Shifting to REVERSE  R  while the vehicle is    moving forward could damage the transaxle   Shift to REVERSE  R  only after the vehicle  is stopped        To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow   ice or sand without damaging the transaxle  see    Stuck   In Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow    in the Index     NEUTRAL  N   In this position  the engine doesn   t  connect with the wheels  To restart when you    re already  moving  use NEUTRAL  N  only  Also  use  NEUTRAL  N  when the vehicle is being towed           Shifting out of PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N  while  your engine is    racing     running at high speed  is  dangerous  Unless y
37.  RAP     in the Index  In  addition  each passenger door has a window switch     Express Down Window    The driver   s window switch has an auto down feature   This switch is labeled AUTO  Tap the rear of the switch   and the driver   s window will open a small amount  If the  rear of the switch is fully pressed and released  the  window will go all the way down     To stop the window while it is lowering  press the front  of the switch  To raise the window  press and hold the  front of the switch     Lock Out Switch  Four Door Models     On four door models  the driver   s window switch  includes a lock out feature  Push LOCK OUT to   stop front and rear passengers from using their window  switches  The driver can still control all the windows  with the lock on  Push LOCK OUT again to return   to normal window operation  When the colored band  on the switch is showing  the passengers can operate  their windows     Keys    Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition  key is dangerous for many reasons  A child or    others could be badly injured or even killed     They could operate the power windows or other  controls or even make the vehicle move  Don   t  leave the keys in a vehicle with children        This key can be used   for the ignition  as   well as all door locks and  storage compartments     When a new key is delivered  it will come with a bar  coded tag attached to the key ring  Keep the bar code tag  that came with the original keys  Give this tag to your  de
38.  SOON  This light will appear when the  system indicates that it   s time for an oil change  The  system predicts remaining oil life using data from length  of drives  coolant temperature  engine rpm and vehicle  speed  It alerts you to change the oil on a schedule  consistent with the vehicle   s driving conditions  After  changing the oil  the system must be reset  See    How to  Reset the GM Oil Life System       in the Index     a7 LOW  This light will come on when the ignition is  on and the fluid in the washer fluid container is low     2 AJAR  This light alerts you that the trunk is not  fully closed     2 92    LOW TRAC  Low Traction   This light will come on  when the enhanced traction system is limiting wheel  spin  See    Enhanced Traction System    or    Low Traction  Light    in the Index     TRAC OFF  Traction Off   This light lets you know  that the enhanced traction system has been disabled and  will not limit wheel spin  See    Enhanced Traction  System Warning Light    or    Low Traction Light    in   the Index     TRAC  Traction   If the vehicle has the enhanced  traction system  you will have a disable button on the far  right side of the DIC  The enhanced traction system is  automatically activated when you turn the ignition on   This button will activate deactivate the system  If you  need to disable the system  such as when you are stuck  and are rocking the vehicle back and forth  push this  button  See    Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow    in   the I
39.  This is the legal identifier for your vehicle  It appears on  a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel  on the  driver   s side  You can see it if you look through the  windshield from outside your vehicle  The VIN also  appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts  labels and the certificates of title and registration     Engine Identification    The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code  This  code will help you identify your engine  specifications  and replacement parts     Service Parts Identification Label    You ll find this label on the underside of your trunk lid   It   s very helpful if you ever need to order parts  On this  label is       your VIN      the model designation      paint information and  e    a list of all production options and  special equipment     Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle     6 67    Electrical System  Add On Electrical Equipment    NOTICE     Don   t add anything electrical to your vehicle  unless you check with your dealer first  Some    electrical equipment can damage your vehicle  and the damage wouldn   t be covered by your  warranty  Some add on electrical equipment  can keep other components from working as  they should     Your vehicle has an air bag system  Before attempting to  add anything electrical to your vehicle  see    Servicing  Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle    in the Index     6 68       Headlamp Wiring    The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in  the inst
40.  To use the slot  do the following     1  Verify that the shift lever is in PARK  P  and that the  shift lever button is fully released     2  Locate the override access slot on the upper right  side of the shift panel     Remove the override access slot cap    Insert a key into the access slot  press in and hold   Press the shift lever button in and hold    Remove the key from the slot     Pull the shift lever into the desired gear position     GO Oy ON e    Reinstall the override access slot cap     You will not be able to remove the key from the ignition  unless the shift lever is in the PARK  P  position   with the shift lever button fully released      2 35    Starting Your 3100 V6 Engine 2  If your engine won   t start  or starts but then stops    it could be flooded with too much gasoline  Try  pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the  floor and holding it there as you hold the key in  START for not more than 15 seconds at a time   This clears the extra gasoline from the engine     NOTICE  NOTICE     1  With your foot off the accelerator pedal  turn your  ignition key to START  When the engine starts  let  go of the key  The idle speed will go down as your  engine gets warm     Holding your key in START for longer than  15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to    Your engine is designed to work with the  electronics in your vehicle  If you add electrical  parts or accessories  you could change the way  the engine operates  Before adding electrical  equi
41.  Towing a Trailer    in the Index for  more information        2 32    NOTICE     If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can   t  turn it  be sure you are using the correct key  if  so  is it all the way in  If it is  then turn the    steering wheel left and right while you turn the  key hard  Turn the key only with your hand   Using a tool to force it could break the key or the  ignition switch  If none of this works  then your  vehicle needs service        Ignition Positions A  ACCESSORY   This position lets you use things  With the key in the ignition switch  you can turn it to like the radio and windshield wipers when the engine is  five different positions  The ignition switch is located on off  To use accessory  push in the key and turn it toward  the right side of the steering column  you  The steering wheel will stay locked     B  LOCK   This position locks the ignition  steering  wheel and transaxle  It   s a theft deterrent feature    It   s also the only position from which you can remove  the key     C  OFF   This position lets you turn off the engine but  still turn the steering wheel  It doesn   t lock the steering  wheel like LOCK  Use off if you must have the vehicle  pushed or towed     2 33    D  RUN   This position is where the key returns to after  you start the vehicle  With the engine off  you can use  run to display some of the warning and indicator lights     E  START   This position starts the engine     A warning chime will sound if you open the dri
42.  acceleration   cornering  hydroplaning  or peak traction characteristics     Temperature    A  B  C    The temperature grades are A  the highest   B  and C   representing the tire   s resistance to the generation of  heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  test wheel  Sustained high temperature can cause the  material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life  and  excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure   The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  which all passenger car tires must meet under the  Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No  109   Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance  on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum  required by law     Warning  The temperature grade for this tire is  established for a tire that is properly inflated and not  overloaded  Excessive speed  underinflation  or  excessive loading  either separately or in combination   can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure     Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance    The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced  carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life  and best overall performance     Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not  needed  However  if you notice unusual tire wear or  your vehicle pulling one way or the other  the alignment  may need to be reset  If you notice your vehicle  vibrating when driving on a smooth road  your wheels  may n
43.  and keep it at the proper level     If the system is ever reset accidentally  you must change  your oil at 3 000 miles  5 000 km  since your last oil  change  Remember to reset the oil life system whenever  the oil is changed  See    Oil Life System    in the Index  for information on resetting the system     An Emission Control Service     Scheduled Maintenance    ENGINE OIL CHANGE  ACTUAL       ENGINE OIL CHANGE       7 7    Scheduled Maintenance    ENGINE OIL CHANGE       7 8    Scheduled Maintenance    7 500 Miles  12 500 km   Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote        15 000 Miles  25 000 km   Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions    Replace filter if necessary  MILEAGE     An Emission Control Service   See footnote     a S    Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote        22 500 Miles  37 500 km   Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote                                                     7 9    Scheduled Maintenance    30 000 Miles  50 000 km   Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper   ACTUAL    SERVICED BY     SERVICED BY   rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote     MILEAGE  Replace engin
44.  associated with drinking and driving is  a national tragedy  It   s the number one contributor to  the highway death toll  claiming thousands of victims  every year     Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive  a vehicle       Judgment     Muscular Coordination     Vision      Attentiveness     Police records show that almost half of all motor  vehicle related deaths involve alcohol  In most cases   these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking  and driving  In recent years  about 16 000 annual motor  vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use  of alcohol  with more than 300 000 people injured     Many adults    by some estimates  nearly half the adult  population    choose never to drink alcohol  so they  never drive after drinking  For persons under 21  it   s  against the law in every U S  state to drink alcohol   There are good medical  psychological and  developmental reasons for these laws     The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety  problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then  drive  But what if people do  How much is    too much     if the driver plans to drive  It   s a lot less than many  might think  Although it depends on each person   and situation  here is some general information on   the problem     The Blood Alcohol Concentration  BAC  of someone  who is drinking depends upon four things       The amount of alcohol consumed    The drinker   s body weight       The amount of food that is consumed bef
45.  battery in your vehicle has a  another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your built in hydrometer  Do not charge  test or jump  vehicle  Be sure to follow the steps listed below to do start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear    it safely  or light yellow  Replace the battery when there   is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a  cranking complaint    Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling  it won   t work  and it could damage your vehicle        Batteries can hurt you  They can be  dangerous because    e  They contain acid that can burn you       They contain gas that can explode or ignite     They contain enough electricity to burn you     If you don   t follow these steps exactly  some or all  of these things can hurt you        NOTICE     If the other system isn   t a 12 volt system with a  negative ground  both vehicles can be damaged        1  Check the other vehicle  It must have a 12 volt  battery with a negative ground system       Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  can reach  but be sure the vehicles aren   t touching  each other  If they are  it could cause a ground  connection you don   t want  You wouldn   t be able to  start your vehicle  and the bad grounding could  damage the electrical systems     To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling  set  the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in  the jump start procedure  Put an automatic transaxle  in PARK  P  or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL  before sett
46.  be for one  of the following reasons     You   re driving on a very rough road   It   s very hot    The disc is upside down    It is dirty  scratched or wet     The air is very humid   If so  wait about an hour and  try again      If the CD is not playing correctly  for any other  reason  try a known good CD     If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can   t be  corrected  contact your dealer  If your radio displays an  error number  write it down and provide it to your dealer  when reporting the problem     AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player  and Equalizer  If Equipped        Playing the Radio  POWER  Push this knob to turn the system on and off     VOL  Volume   Turn the knob clockwise to increase  volume  Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume     RECALL  Press this button to display the station being  played or to display the clock  Pressing this button with  the ignition off will display the clock     Finding a Station    AM FM  Press this button to switch between AM   FM1 and FM2  The display shows your selection     TUNE  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn it to  choose radio stations  Press the knob back into its stored  position when you   re not using it     A SEEK V  Press the up or down arrow to go to the  next or previous station and stay there   Setting Preset Stations    The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to  your favorite stations  You can set up to 18 stations   six AM  six FM1 and six FM2  by performing the  following steps 
47.  breathe  Improper fluid  levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level  of emissions from your vehicle  To help protect our  environment  and to keep your vehicle in good  condition  please maintain your vehicle properly     Maintenance Requirements    Maintenance intervals  checks  inspections and  recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this  manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good  working condition  Any damage caused by failure to  follow recommended maintenance may not be covered  by warranty     How This Section is Organized  This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts        Part A  Scheduled Maintenance Services    explains  what to have done and how often  Some of these  services can be complex  so unless you are technically  qualified and have the necessary equipment  you should  let your dealer   s service department or another qualified  service center do these jobs     Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can  be dangerous  In trying to do some jobs  you can    be seriously injured  Do your own maintenance  work only if you have the required know how  and the proper tools and equipment for the job   If you have any doubt  have a qualified  technician do the work     If you want to get the service information  see    Service  and Owner Publications    in the Index           Part B  Owner Checks and Services    tells you  what should be checked and when  It also explains  what you can easily do to help keep your vehicl
48.  burned   Check your oil as soon as possible and have your  vehicle serviced     NOTICE     Damage to your engine from neglected oil  problems can be costly and is not covered by  your warranty        Low Oil Level Light    The engine is equipped with  an oil level monitoring  system  When the ignition  key is turned to RUN  the  LOW OIL LEVEL light  will briefly flash     LOW OIL  LEVEL    If the light does not flash  have it fixed so it will be  ready to warn you if there is a problem     If the light stays on  stop the vehicle on a level surface  and turn the engine off  Check the oil level using the  engine oil dipstick  See    Engine Oil    in the Index     The oil level monitoring system only checks the oil level  during the brief period when the ignition key is between  RUN and START  It does not monitor engine oil level  when the engine is running  Additionally  an oil level  check is only performed if the engine has been turned  off for a considerable period of time  allowing the oil  normally in circulation to drain back into the oil pan     Security Light    This message is  displayed to monitor the  Pass Key   III system     SECURITY    If the SECURITY message is displayed continuously  while driving  there may be a problem with the  Pass Key III system  Your vehicle will not be protected  by Pass Key III  and you should see your dealer for  service  For more information see    PASS Key m    System    in the Index     2 89    Fuel Gage       United States Canada  
49.  by an    MS      for mud and snow      If you ever replace your tires with those not having  a TPC Spec number  make sure they are the same  size  load range  speed rating and construction type   bias  bias belted or radial  as your original tires     Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while  driving  If you mix tires of different sizes or types   radial and bias belted tires   the vehicle may not    handle properly  and you could have a crash   Using tires of different sizes may also cause  damage to your vehicle  Be sure to use the same  size and type tires on all wheels     It   s all right to drive with your compact spare   though  It was developed for use on your vehicle        If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle  the    wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after  many miles of driving  A tire and or wheel could  fail suddenly  causing a crash  Use only radial ply  tires with the wheels on your vehicle        6 53    Uniform Tire Quality Grading    Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire  sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section  width  For example     Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A    The following information relates to the system  developed by the United States National Highway  Traffic Safety Administration  which grades tires by  treadwear  traction and temperature performance     This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States    The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most  passenger car tires  The 
50.  child   s body with the harness and also sometimes  with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields     1 40    A booster seat  F G  is a child restraint designed to  improve the fit of the vehicle   s safety belt system   Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner   and some high back booster seats have a five point  harness  A booster seat can also help a child to see out  the window     Q  How do child restraints work         A child restraint system is any device designed for  use in a motor vehicle to restrain  seat  or position  children  A built in child restraint system is a  permanent part of the motor vehicle  An add on  child restraint system is a portable one  which is  purchased by the vehicle   s owner     For many years  add on child restraints have   used the adult belt system in the vehicle  To help  reduce the chance of injury  the child also has to  be secured within the restraint  The vehicle   s belt  system secures the add on child restraint in the  vehicle  and the add on child restraint   s harness  system holds the child in place within the restraint     One system  the three point harness  has straps   that come down over each of the infant   s shoulders  and buckle together at the crotch  The five point  harness system has two shoulder straps  two hip  straps and a crotch strap  A shield may take the  place of hip straps  A T shaped shield has shoulder  straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low  against the child   s body 
51.  compact spare tire in the trunk     v       N       5 36    Compact Spare Tire    Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated  when your vehicle was new  it can lose air after a time   Check the inflation pressure regularly  It should   be 60 psi  420 kPa      After installing the compact spare on your vehicle    you should stop as soon as possible and make sure   your spare tire is correctly inflated  The compact spare  is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph    105 km h  for distances up to 3 000 miles  5 000 km    so you can finish your trip and have your full size tire  repaired or replaced where you want  Of course  it   s best  to replace your spare with a full size tire as soon as you  can  Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in  case you need it again     NOTICE     When the compact spare is installed  don   t take  your vehicle through an automatic car wash with  guide rails  The compact spare can get caught on  the rails  That can damage the tire and wheel  and  maybe other parts of your vehicle        Don   t use your compact spare on other vehicles     And don   t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with  other wheels or tires  They won   t fit  Keep your spare  tire and its wheel together     NOTICE     Tire chains won   t fit your compact spare  Using    them can damage your vehicle and can damage  the chains too  Don   t use tire chains on your  compact spare        5 37    If You   re Stuck  In Sand  Mud   Ice or Snow    In order t
52.  could result in blown vehicle or  adapter fuses  If you experience a problem  see your dealer  for additional information on the accessory power plugs     NOTICE     Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle  can damage it or keep other things from working  as they should  This wouldn   t be covered by your  warranty  Check with your dealer before adding  electrical equipment  and never use anything that  exceeds the fuse rating        When adding electrical equipment  be sure to follow the    proper installation instructions included with the equipment     NOTICE     Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs    only  Do not hang any type of accessory or  accessory bracket from the plug  Improper use of  the power outlet can cause damage not covered  by your warranty        Auxiliary Power Connection   Power Drop     The vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary power  connection  This feature provides power ground and  accessing wires which can be used to add aftermarket  electrical equipment to the vehicle  The connection is  located on the passenger   s side of the vehicle  below the  glove box on the right side of the console     OnStar   System  If Equipped     OnStar is a vehicle communications system that  offers a variety of services and provides a one touch  hands free communication link between you and the  OnStar Center  To receive OnStar services  a service  subscription agreement is required and an additional  fee may be required  Services are available 
53.  designed to work with the  electronics in your vehicle  If you add electrical  parts or accessories  you could change the way  the engine operates  Before adding electrical  equipment  check with your dealer  If you don   t   your engine might not perform properly        2 37    Engine Coolant Heater  Option  To Use the Engine Coolant Heater  1  Turn off the engine     2  Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord   The cord is located below the engine air  cleaner filter near the coolant reservoir bottle   See    Engine Compartment Overview    in the  Index for more information on location     3  Plug it into a normal  grounded 110 volt AC outlet     Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet  could cause an electrical shock  Also  the wrong  kind of extension cord could overheat and cause       In very cold weather  0  F   18  C  or colder  the engine  coolant heater can help  You   ll get easier starting and  better fuel economy during engine warm up  Usually   the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of  four hours prior to starting your vehicle  At temperatures heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for  above 32  F  0  C   use of the coolant heater is at least 15 amps    not required     a fire  You could be seriously injured  Plug the  cord into a properly grounded three prong  110 volt AC outlet  If the cord won   t reach  use a       2 38    4  Before starting the engine  be sure to unplug  and store the cord as it was before to keep it away  from m
54.  fabric belt to clean  the tape head  This type of cleaning cassette will not  eject on its own  A non scrubbing action cleaner may  not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner   The use of a non scrubbing action  dry type cleaning  cassette is not recommended     After you clean the player  press and hold EJECT for  five seconds to reset the CLN indicator  The radio will  display     to show the indicator was reset     Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may  degrade over time  Always make sure the cassette tape is in  good condition before you have your tape player serviced     Care of Your Compact Discs    Handle discs carefully  Store them in their original cases  or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight  and dust  If the surface of a disc is soiled  dampen a  clean  soft cloth in a mild  neutral detergent solution and  clean it  wiping from the center to the edge     Be sure never to touch the side without writing when  handling discs  Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges  or the edge of the hole and the outer edge     Care of Your Compact Disc Player    The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised  due to  the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with  lubricants internal to the CD mechanism     Backglass Antenna    Your AM FM antenna is integrated with your rear  window defogger  located in the rear window     Be sure that the inside surface of the rear window is not  scratched and that the lines on the glass 
55.  hold the shift lever button  located  on the front of the shift lever       Push the lever all the way toward the front of  the vehicle     3  Turn the ignition key to LOCK     4  Remove the key and take it with you  If you can  leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your  hand  your vehicle is in PARK  P      Leaving Your Vehicle With the  Engine Running    It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the  engine running  Your vehicle could move  suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK  P     with the parking brake firmly set  And  if you  leave the vehicle with the engine running  it could  overheat and even catch fire  You or others could  be injured  Don   t leave your vehicle with the  engine running unless you have to        If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine  running  be sure the vehicle is in PARK  P  and the  parking brake is firmly set before you leave it  After  you    ve moved the shift lever into PARK  P   hold the  regular brake pedal down  Then  see if you can move the  shift lever away from PARK  P   without first pushing  the shift lever button   If you can  it means that the shift  lever wasn   t fully locked into PARK  P      2 45    Torque Lock    If you are parking on a hill and you don   t shift your  transaxle into PARK  P  properly  the weight of the  vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in  the transaxle  You may find it difficult to pull the shift  lever out of PARK  P   This is called    torque lock     
56.  if it becomes separated from the hitch  Instructions  about safety chains may be provided by the hitch  manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer  Follow the  manufacturer   s recommendation for attaching safety  chains and do not attach them to the bumper  Always  leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig   And  never allow safety chains to drag on the ground     Trailer Brakes    Because you have anti lock brakes  do not try to tap into  your vehicle   s brake system  If you do  both brake  systems won   t work well  or at all     Driving with a Trailer    Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience   Before setting out for the open road  you    ll want to get  to know your rig  Acquaint yourself with the feel of  handling and braking with the added weight of the  trailer  And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are  driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as  responsive as your vehicle is by itself     Before you start  check the trailer hitch and platform   and attachments   safety chains  electrical connector   lamps  tires and mirror adjustment  If the trailer has  electric brakes  start your vehicle and trailer moving and  then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure  the brakes are working  This lets you check your  electrical connection at the same time     During your trip  check occasionally to be sure that the  load is secure  and that the lamps and any trailer brakes  are still working     Following Distance
57.  in heavy traffic    Cruise control can be dangerous on  slippery roads  On such roads  fast changes  in tire traction can cause needless wheel  spinning  and you could lose control  Don   t  use cruise control on slippery roads        If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction  control system on the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine or  the enhanced traction system on the 3100 V6 and   3800 V6 engine begins to limit wheel spin  the cruise  control will automatically disengage  See    Traction  Control System    or    Enhanced Traction System    in the  Index  When road conditions allow you to safely use it  again  you may turn the cruise control back on     Setting Cruise Control    If you leave your cruise control switch on when  you   re not using cruise  you might hit a button    and go into cruise when you don   t want to  You  could be startled and even lose control  Keep the  cruise control switch off until you want to use  cruise control     1  Move the cruise control switch to ON   2  Get up to the speed you want     3  Push in the SET button at the end of the  multifunction lever and release it     4  Take your foot off the accelerator pedal        Resuming a Set Speed    Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed and  then you apply the brake  This  of course  shuts off the  cruise control  But you don   t need to reset it     Once you   re going about 25 mph  40 km h  or more  again  you can move the cruise control switch from ON  to R A  Resume A
58.  is      Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time  on two lane roads  Reconsider before passing the  next vehicle     Don   t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly   Even though the brake lamps are not flashing  it may  be slowing down or starting to turn     If you   re being passed  make it easy for the  following driver to get ahead of you  Perhaps you  can ease a little to the right     Loss of Control    Let   s review what driving experts say about what  happens when the three control systems  brakes  steering  and acceleration  don   t have enough friction where the  tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked     In any emergency  don   t give up  Keep trying to  steer and constantly seek an escape route or area  of less danger     Skidding    In a skid  a driver can lose control of the vehicle   Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  care suited to existing conditions  and by not     overdriving    those conditions  But skids are   always possible     The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle   s  three control systems  In the braking skid  your wheels  aren   t rolling  In the steering or cornering skid  too  much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and  lose cornering force  And in the acceleration skid  too  much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin     A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off  the accelerator pedal     If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System or the  Trac
59.  is  intended to provide you with peace of mind as you  drive in the city or travel the open road     Pontiac   s Roadside Assistance toll free number is  staffed by a team of technically trained advisors  who  are available 24 hours a day  365 days a year     We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing  minor repair information over the phone or making  arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest   Pontiac dealer     We will provide the following services for  3 years 36 000 miles  60 000 km   at no expense to you       Fuel delivery     Lock out service  identification required      Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service     Change a flat tire     Jump starts    We have quick  easy access to telephone numbers of the  following additional services depending on your needs       Hotels    Glass replacement       Tire repair facilities      Rental vehicle or taxis     Airports or train stations     Police  fire department or hospitals    In many instances  mechanical failures are covered  under Pontiac   s comprehensive warranty  However   when other services are utilized  our advisors will  explain any payment obligations you might incur     For prompt and efficient assistance when calling  please  provide the following information to give the advisor     Location of vehicle   Telephone number of your location  Vehicle model  year and color  Mileage of vehicle   Vehicle Identification Number  VIN     Vehicle license plate number    Pontiac reserves the
60.  it  serviced and maintained  it   s ready to go  If it needs  service  have it done before starting out  Of course   you    ll find experienced and able service experts in  Pontiac dealerships all across North America   They    ll be ready and willing to help if you need it     Here are some things you can check before a trip       Windshield Washer Fluid  Is the reservoir full   Are all windows clean inside and outside     Wiper Blades  Are they in good shape        Fuel  Engine Oil  Other Fluids  Have you checked  all levels       Lamps  Are they all working  Are the lenses clean     Tires  They are vitally important to a safe   trouble free trip  Is the tread good enough for  long distance driving  Are the tires all inflated to the  recommended pressure       Weather Forecasts  What   s the weather outlook  along your route  Should you delay your trip a short  time to avoid a major storm system       Maps  Do you have up to date maps     Highway Hypnosis    Is there actually such a condition as    highway hypnosis      Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel  Call it  highway hypnosis  lack of awareness  or whatever     There is something about an easy stretch of road with  the same scenery  along with the hum of the tires on the  road  the drone of the engine  and the rush of the wind  against the vehicle that can make you sleepy  Don   t let it  happen to you  If it does  your vehicle can leave the  road in less than a second  and you could crash and   be injure
61.  mode your vehicle is set  for  If you do not wish to change the current mode   you can either exit the programming mode by  following the instructions earlier in this section or  program the next feature available on your vehicle     4  Turn the interior lamps thumbwheel all the way to  the right and then back slightly to the left again to  change the current mode     5  Repeat Step 4 until you hear the number of chimes  that matches the number of the mode you want     The mode you selected is now set  You can either exit  the programming mode by following the instructions  earlier in this section or program the next feature  available on your vehicle     2 16    Automatic Door Locks    With automatic door locks  all doors will automatically  lock when you shift out of PARK  P  and automatically  unlock when the ignition is turned to OFF     Programmable Modes    Mode 1  Both Features Off     Automatic door locking  and unlocking are disabled  You will always need to  lock your doors manually before driving to increase  occupant safety        All doors will lock when you press the power door  lock switch rearward or when you press the LOCK  on the remote keyless entry transmitter  if equipped      e  All doors will unlock when you press the power door  lock switch forward or when you press UNLOCK on  the remote keyless entry transmitter  if equipped      Mode 2  Automatic Door Locking Only      Automatic Door Unlocking  The automatic door  unlock feature is turned off       
62.  necessary   2  Firmly apply the parking brake  See    Parking Brake       Do not use the accelerator pedal  and be ready to turn    in the Index if necessary     off the engine immediately if it starts     3  Try to start the engine in each gear  The starter Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately    should work only in PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N   if the vehicle begins to move   If the starter works in any other position  your 3  With the engine off  turn the key to the RUN  vehicle needs service  position  but don   t start the engine  Without applying    the regular brake  try to move the shift lever out of  PARK  P  with normal effort  If the shift lever  moves out of PARK  P   your vehicle needs service     7 17    Ignition Transaxle Lock Check    While parked  and with the parking brake set  try to turn  the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position       The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift  lever is in PARK  P        The key should come out only in LOCK     Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK  P   Mechanism Check    When you are doing this check  your vehicle  could begin to move  You or others could be    injured and property could be damaged  Make  sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case  it begins to roll  Be ready to apply the regular  brake at once should the vehicle begin to move        7 18    Park on a fairly steep hill  with the vehicle facing  downhill  Keeping your foot on the regular brake   set the parking brake 
63.  operate easily  and give years of listening pleasure  You will get the  most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it  first  Find out what your audio system can do and how  to operate all of its controls  to be sure you   re getting the  most out of the advanced engineering that went into it     Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory  Power  RAP   With RAP  you can play your audio  system even after the ignition is turned off  See     Retained Accessory Power  RAP     in the Index     Setting the Clock    Press RECALL  then press and hold HR or MIN for two  seconds  Then press and hold HR until the correct hour  appears  AM or PM will appear on the display  Press and  hold MIN until the correct minute appears  The clock  can only be set with the ignition off     AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player    ay  Fa i        Playing the Radio  POWER  Push this knob to turn the system on and off     VOL  Volume   Turn this knob clockwise to increase  volume  Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume     RECALL  Press this button to display the time with the  ignition on or off  When the radio is playing  press this  knob to display the station frequency     Finding a Station    AM FM  Press this button to switch between AM  FM1  and FM2  The display shows your selection     TUNE  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn it to  choose radio stations  Press the knob back into its stored  position when you    re not using it     ASEEKY  Press the up or 
64.  reinstall it     11  Carefully reinstall the taillamp assembly by  reversing Steps 1 through 5  Be careful to avoid  scratching or chipping the vehicle   s paint     12  Close the rear compartment        6 47    Windshield Wiper  Blade Replacement    Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at  least twice a year for wear or cracking  See     Windshield Wipers  Blade Check    in the  Index for more information     Replacement blades come in different types and are  removed in different ways  For the proper type and  length  see    Normal Maintenance and Replacement  Parts    in the Index     6 48    To remove the wiper blade do the following        1  Pull the windshield wiper arm away from  the windshield     2  Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly  toward the driver   s side of the vehicle     3  Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2     Tires    Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by  a leading tire manufacturer  If you ever have questions Underinflated tires pose the same danger as  about your tire warranty and where to obtain service  see overloaded tires  The resulting accident  your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details  could cause serious injury  Check all tires  frequently to maintain the recommended  pressure  Tire pressure should be checked  when your tires are cold     Overinflated tires are more likely to be   cut  punctured or broken by a sudden  impact    such as when you hit a pothole   Keep tires at the recommended 
65.  repair  at no charge to the owner  the surfaces of  new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within  12 months or 12 000 miles  20 000 km  of purchase   whichever occurs first     6 65    GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials    PARTNUMBER   SIZE   DESCRIPTION  994954 Polishing Cloth     Wax Treated  1050172 Tar and Road Oil Remover  1050173 Chrome Cleaner and Polish  1050174 White Sidewall Tire Cleaner  1050214 Vinyl Cleaner  1050427 Glass Cleaner    1052929 16 oz   0 473 L  Chrome and Wire Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and  Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers   12377964 16 oz   0 473 L  Finish Enhancer Removes dust  fingerprints and surface contaminants   Spray on wipe off   12377965 16 oz   0 473 L  Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks  fine scratches and other light  surface contamination     12377966 16 oz   0 473 L  Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish   Foaming Tire Cleans  shines and protects in one easy step   12319138 19 02  0ML  Shine   Low Gloss No wiping necessary   Medium foaming shampoo  Cleans and lightly waxes   1238401 16 oz   0 473 L  Wash Wax Concentrate Biodegradable and phosphate free   12378488 8 oz   0 237 L  Spot Lifter Quickly and easily removes spots and stains from  carpets  vinyl and cloth upholstery     See your General Motors parts department for these products   See  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  in the Index        6 66    Vehicle Identification Number  VIN        SAMPLE4UX1M072675  a    
66.  right to limit services or  reimbursement to an owner or driver when  in Pontiac   s  judgement  the claims become excessive in frequency or  type of occurrence     While we hope you never have the occasion to use our  service  it is added security while traveling for you and  your family  Remember  we   re only a phone call away   Pontiac Roadside Assistance    1 800 ROADSIDE   or 1 800 762 3743  text telephone  TTY  users    call 1 888 889 2438     Canadian Roadside Assistance    Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive  Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere  in Canada or the United States  Please refer to the  Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book or  call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services     Courtesy Transportation    Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its  offering of motor vehicles  To enhance your ownership  experience  we and our participating dealers are proud  to offer Courtesy Transportation  a customer support  program for new vehicles     The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to  retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with  the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the  New Vehicle Limited Warranty  Several transportation  options are available when warranty repairs are  required  This will reduce your inconvenience during  warranty repairs     Plan Ahead When Possible    When your vehicle requires warranty service  you  should contact your dealer and request an appointment   By scheduling a se
67.  roads  but then you would also want to use    instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  D   your brakes off and on       When driving on hilly  winding roads     NOTICE       When towing a trailer  so there is less shifting    between gears   Don   t drive in SECOND  2  for more than    25 miles  40 km   or at speeds over 55 mph  When driving in non highway scenarios  90 km h   or you can damage your transaxle    i e  city streets  etc    Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  D  or  THIRD  3  as much as possible     Don   t shift into SECOND  2  unless you are  going slower than 65 mph  105 km h   or you  can damage your engine     When going down a steep hill        2 42    FIRST  1   This position gives you even more power   but lower fuel economy  than SECOND  2   You can  use it on very steep hills  or in deep snow or mud  If the  shift lever is in FIRST  1   the transaxle won   t shift into  first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough     NOTICE     If your front wheels can   t turn  don   t try to drive   This might happen if you were stuck in very deep  sand or mud or were up against a solid object     You could damage your transaxle    Also  if you stop when going uphill  don   t hold  your vehicle there with only the accelerator  pedal  This could overheat and damage the  transaxle  Use your brakes or shift into PARK  P   to hold your vehicle in position on a hill        Parking Brake    The parking brake is located  to the left of the brake   pedal near the driver   s door   To s
68.  some cities   Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent  features  we know that nothing we put on it can make  it impossible to steal  However  there are ways you  can help     Key in the Ignition    If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside  it   s an  easy target for joy riders or professional thieves    so  don   t do it     When you park your vehicle and open the driver   s door   you    ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key  from the ignition and take it with you  Always do this   Your steering wheel will be locked  and so will your  ignition and transaxle  And remember to lock the doors     Parking at Night    Park in a lighted spot  close all windows and lock your  vehicle  Remember to keep your valuables out of sight   Put them in a storage area  or take them with you     Parking Lots    Even if you park in a lot where someone will be  watching your vehicle  it   s still best to lock it up and  take your keys  But what if you have to leave your key        If possible  park in a busy  well lit area        Put your valuables in a storage area  like your trunk  or glove box     Be sure to close and lock the storage area   Close all windows   Lock the glove box     Lock all the doors except the driver   s     If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system   take the transmitter with you     2 27    Content Theft Deterrent   If Equipped     The vehicle may have a theft deterrent alarm system        A red light located on top of the instrumen
69.  surface  scratches and water spotting     High pressure car washes may cause water to enter  your vehicle     Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses    Use only lukewarm or cold water  a soft cloth and a car  washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses  Follow  instructions under    Washing Your Vehicle        Finish Care    Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by  hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint  finish  You can get GM approved cleaning products  from your dealer  See    Appearance Care and Materials     in the Index     Your vehicle has a    basecoat clearcoat       paint finish   The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored  basecoat  Always use waxes and polishes that are  non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat   paint finish     NOTICE     Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on  a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the  finish or leave swirl marks        Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other  salts  ice melting agents  road oil and tar  tree sap  bird  droppings  chemicals from industrial chimneys  etc   can  damage your vehicle   s finish if they remain on painted  surfaces  Wash the vehicle as soon as possible  If  necessary  use non abrasive cleaners that are marked  safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter     Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging  weather  and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period  of years  You can help to keep the paint finish lo
70.  the next feature available on your vehicle     4  Press LOCK on the power door lock switch again to  change the current mode     5  Repeat Step 4 until you hear the number of chimes  that matches the mode you want     The mode you selected is now set  You can either exit  the programming mode by following the instructions  earlier in this section or program the next feature  available on your vehicle     2 17    Last Door Closed Locking and  Lockout Prevention    With the last door closed locking and lockout prevention  features  your vehicle will do the following        If you leave your key in the ignition and leave the  driver   s door open  you won   t be able to use the  power door lock switches to lock the doors       The doors will not lock when you press LOCK on  the driver   s door arm rest or the lock button on the  remote keyless entry transmitter  if equipped  while  any door is open  Instead  you will hear three chimes  which let you know that the last door closed  locking feature is in operation  Five seconds after  all the doors are closed  all the doors will  automatically lock     Programmable Modes    Mode 1  Both Features Off     Doors will always   lock immediately when you press LOCK on the driver   s  door armrest or the remote keyless entry transmitter    if equipped     Mode 2  Lockout Prevention Only     If you leave your  key in the ignition with the driver   s door open  you will  not be able to lock the doors using your power locks     2 18    Mod
71.  the passenger seatback fully forward    The whole seat will now slide forward  If the seatback  will not tilt  lift the seatback latch located on the back of  the seat to tilt the seatback forward  The whole seat will  now slide forward     After someone gets into the rear seat area  move the  passenger front seatback to its original position  Then  move the seat rearward until it locks     To get out  tilt the seatback fully forward and slide the  seat forward out of the way     If the seatback isn   t locked  it could move forward    in a sudden stop or crash  That could cause injury  to the person sitting there  Always press rearward  on the seatback to be sure it is locked        Safety Belts  They   re for Everyone    This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts  properly  It also tells you some things you should not do  with safety belts     And it explains the Supplemental Restraint  System  SRS   or air bag system     Don   t let anyone ride where he or she can   t wear  a safety belt properly  If you are in a crash and  you   re not wearing a safety belt  your injuries    can be much worse  You can hit things inside the  vehicle or be ejected from it  You can be seriously  injured or killed  In the same crash  you might  not be if you are buckled up  Always fasten your  safety belt  and check that your passengers    belts  are fastened properly too        It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area   inside or outside of a vehicle  In a collision 
72.  the radiator   see    Cooling System    in the Index     Radiator Pressure Cap Power Steering Fluid    The radiator pressure cap is located in the front of the The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the  engine compartment on the passenger   s side  near the engine compartment next to the engine coolant recovery  diagonal cross brace and the battery  See    Engine tank  In the 3800 V6  Code K  engine and the 3800 V6  Compartment Overview    in the Index for more Supercharged  Code I  engine  the power steering fluid  information on location  reservoir sits low in the engine compartment  See       Engine Compartment Overview    in the Index     NOTICE     Your radiator cap is a 15 psi  105 kPa   pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to    prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage  from overheating  Be sure the arrows on the cap  line up with the overflow tube on the radiator  filler neck        3100 V6 Engine 3800 V6 or 3800 V6  Supercharged Engine    6 31    When to Check Power Steering Fluid    It is not necessary to regularly check power steering  fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or  you hear an unusual noise  A fluid loss in this system  could indicate a problem  Have the system inspected and  repaired  See    Engine Compartment Overview    in the  Index for reservoir location     How to Check Power Steering Fluid    Turn the key off  let the engine compartment cool down   wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean  the
73.  the vehicle you want to pass    while you   re awaiting an opportunity  For one thing   following too closely reduces your area of vision   especially if you   re following a larger vehicle    Also  you won   t have adequate space if the vehicle  ahead suddenly slows or stops  Keep back a  reasonable distance     When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up   start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don   t  get too close  Time your move so you will be  increasing speed as the time comes to move into the  other lane  If the way is clear to pass  you will have a     running start    that more than makes up for the  distance you would lose by dropping back  And if  something happens to cause you to cancel your pass   you need only slow down and drop back again and  wait for another opportunity     If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle  wait  your turn  But take care that someone isn   t trying to  pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle   Remember to glance over your shoulder and check  the blind spot     4 16    Check your mirrors  glance over your shoulder  and  start your left lane change signal before moving out  of the right lane to pass  When you are far enough  ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your  inside mirror  activate your right lane change signal  and move back into the right lane   Remember that  your right outside mirror is convex  The vehicle you  just passed may seem to be farther away from you  than it really
74.  well  you may need to  slow down and keep more space between you and  other vehicles       Slow down  especially on higher speed roads  Your  headlamps can light up only so much road ahead        Inremote areas  watch for animals        If you   re tired  pull off the road in a safe place  and rest                                                                                Night driving is more dangerous than day driving   One reason is that some drivers are likely to be  impaired    by alcohol or drugs  with night vision  problems  or by fatigue     4 18    No one can see as well at night as in the daytime  But as  we get older these differences increase  A 50 year old  driver may require at least twice as much light to see the  same thing at night as a 20 year old     What you do in the daytime can also affect your night  vision  For example  if you spend the day in bright  sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses  Your eyes  will have less trouble adjusting to night  But if you   re  driving  don   t wear sunglasses at night  They may cut  down on glare from headlamps  but they also make a lot  of things invisible     You can be temporarily blinded by approaching  headlamps  It can take a second or two  or even several  seconds  for your eyes to readjust to the dark  When you  are faced with severe glare  as from a driver who  doesn   t lower the high beams  or a vehicle with  misaimed headlamps   slow down a little  Avoid staring  directly into the approaching headlam
75.  without first reading  the note contained in the description for that mode   The door key lock cylinder must remain in the  unlock position during Steps 2 through 4       Press the horn symbol on the remote keyless    entry transmitter     2 24    Ti    Count the number of chimes you hear  The number  of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for   If you do not wish to change the current mode  you  can either exit the programming mode by following  the instructions earlier in this section or program the  next feature available on your vehicle     Press the horn symbol on the remote keyless entry  transmitter again to change the current mode     Repeat Step 5 until you hear the number of chimes  that matches the mode you want     Remove the key from the door key cylinder     The mode you selected is now set  You can either exit  the programming mode by following the instructions  earlier in this section or program the next feature  available on your vehicle     Trunk    It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid  open because carbon monoxide  CO  gas can  come into your vehicle  You can   t see or smell    CO  It can cause unconsciousness and even death     If you must drive with the trunk open or if  electrical wiring or other cable connections must  pass through the seal between the body and  the trunk      Make sure all other windows are shut       Turn the fan on your heating or cooling  system to its highest speed with the setting  on VENT  That will force 
76.  you wouldn   t  get the overheat warning  Your engine could  catch fire and you or others could be burned   Use a 50 50 mixture of clean  drinkable water  and DEX COOL   coolant     A CAUTION     NOTICE  You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  engine parts  Coolant contains ethylene glycol    and it will burn if the engine parts are hot    In cold weather  water can freeze and crack the  enough  Don   t spill coolant on a hot engine     engine  radiator  heater core and other parts   Use the recommended coolant and the proper  coolant mixture        5 17    When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the  COLD mark  start your vehicle     If the overheat warning continues  there   s one more  thing you can try  You can add the proper coolant  mixture directly to the radiator  but be sure the cooling  system is cool before you do it     Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling  system can blow out and burn you badly  They  are under pressure  and if you turn the pressure    cap    even a little    they can come out at high  speed  Never turn the cap when the cooling  system  including the radiator pressure cap  is  hot  Wait for the cooling system and radiator  pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the  pressure cap        5 18       How to Add Coolant to the Radiator The radiator pressure cap is located on the passenger   s side  of the vehicle in the front of the engine compartment  near    the battery and the diagonal cross brace  See    Engine 
77.  your vehicle     2 22    Arm the system when you lock the doors using either  power door lock switch while any door is open and  the key is removed from the ignition     Arm the system when you lock the doors with your  remote keyless entry transmitter and the key is  removed form the ignition     Disarm the system when you unlock the doors with  your key or remote keyless entry transmitter     Programmable Modes  Mode 1  Power Door Lock Switch Arming Off       The content theft deterrent system will arm when  you lock the doors with the remote keyless entry  transmitter  The key must be removed from the  ignition when you lock the doors or the content  theft deterrent system will not arm        The content theft deterrent system will disarm when  you unlock the doors with the keys or the remote  keyless entry transmitter     Mode 2  Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter  Arm Disarm Only      The content theft deterrent system will arm when  you lock the doors with the remote keyless entry  transmitter  The key must be removed from the  ignition when you lock the doors or the content  theft deterrent system will not arm        The content theft deterrent system will disarm  when you unlock the doors with the remote keyless  entry transmitter     While this mode provides increased security  it can be a  problem if the remote keyless entry transmitter is  damaged  lost or if it fails to operate for any reason  while the content theft deterrent system is armed  The  content theft de
78. 24 hours  a day  7 days a week  For more information    call 1 888 ONSTAR 7  1 888 667 8277          OnStar Services Button   Press this button once  to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with  these services  If you are not quickly connected  the  system will automatically reset and redial  This ensures  connection to the center  there is no additional action  required  Press the Communication button to cancel the  automatic redial      Emergency Button   In an emergency situation   press the emergency service button  Upon receiving the  call  an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and  assess the situation  If necessary  the advisor will alert  the nearest emergency service provider     2 69         Communication Button   Press this button   at the end of a call  Also press this button to answer a  call from the center  or cancel a call if one of the other  buttons is accidentally pressed  This button is also  used to access OnStar Personal Calling and Virtual  Advisor services  See the OnStar owner package for  more information     Volume Control  You can control the volume of the  OnStar system using either the volume knob on the    radio or if equipped  the steering wheel volume controls         Telltale Light   This light will indicate the status of    the system  A solid green light will come on when you  start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on  and is ready to make or receive calls     If the light blinks green it means that a
79. 3  Buckle the belt  Make sure the release button is  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  safety belt quickly if you ever had to        4  Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  the retractor to set the lock       To tighten the belt  feed the shoulder belt back    into the retractor while you push down on the  child restraint  If you   re using a forward facing  child restraint  you may find it helpful to use your  knee to push down on the child restraint as you  tighten the belt       Push and pull the child restraint in different    directions to be sure it is secure     1 45    To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle   s  safety belt and let it go back all the way  The safety belt  will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult  or larger child passenger     Securing a Child Restraint in the Center  Rear Seat Position    y               You ll be using the lap belt  Be sure to follow the  instructions that came with the child restraint   Secure the child in the child restraint when and  as the instructions say     See the earlier part about the top strap if the child  restraint has one     1 46         Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch  plate and pulling it along the belt       Put the restraint on the seat       Run the vehicle   s safety belt through or around the    restraint  The child restraint instructions will show  you how     5  To tighten the belt  pull its free end while you  push down 
80. 34 Recreational Vehicle Towing   4 15 Off Road Recovery 4 35 Loading Your Vehicle   4 15 Passing 4 37 Towing a Trailer    4 17 Loss of Control       Defensive Driving    The best advice anyone can give about driving is   Drive defensively     Please start with a very important safety device in your  vehicle  Buckle up  See    Safety Belts    in the Index      gt     Defensive driving really means    be ready for anything      On city streets  rural roads or freeways  it means     always expect the unexpected        Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be  careless and make mistakes  Anticipate what they might  do  Be ready for their mistakes     Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of  accidents  Yet they are common  Allow enough  following distance  It   s the best defensive driving  maneuver  in both city and rural driving  You never  know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake  or turn suddenly     Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate  on the driving task  Anything that distracts from the  driving task    such as concentrating on a cellular  telephone call  reading  or reaching for something on  the floor    makes proper defensive driving more  difficult and can even cause a collision  with resulting  injury  Ask a passenger to help do things like this    or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself   These simple defensive driving techniques could save  your life     Drunken Driving    Death and injury
81. 50 00    Service Bulletins    Service Bulletins give technical service information  needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars  and trucks  Each bulletin contains instructions to assist  in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle     Owner   s Information    Owner publications are written specifically for owners  and intended to provide basic operational information  about the vehicle  The owner   s manual will include the  Maintenance Schedule for all models     In Portfolio  Includes a Portfolio  Owner   s Manual and  Warranty Booklet     RETAIL SELL PRICE   35 00    Without Portfolio  Owner   s Manual only   RETAIL SELL PRICE   25 00    Current and Past Model Order Forms  Service Publications are available for current and  past model GM vehicles  To request an order form   please specify year and model name of the vehicle     ORDER TOLL FREE  1 800 551 4123     Monday Friday 8 00 AM     6 00 PM Eastern Time    Visit Helm  Inc  on the World Wide Web at  www helminc com    For Credit Card Orders Only  VISA MasterCard Discover     Helm  Incorporated    P O  Box 07130   Detroit  MI 48207    Prices are subject to change without notice and without  incurring obligation  Allow ample time for delivery     8 12    Note to Canadian Customers  All listed prices are quoted in U S  funds   Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S  funds     
82. A  U S  Department of Transportation  Washington  D C  20590    You can also obtain other information about motor  vehicle safety from the hotline     REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO  THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT    If you live in Canada  and you believe that your vehicle  has a safety defect  you should immediately notify  Transport Canada  in addition to notifying General  Motors of Canada Limited  You may write to     Transport Canada   330 Sparks Street   Tower C   Ottawa  Ontario K1A ON5    REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO  GENERAL MOTORS    In addition to notifying NHTSA  or Transport Canada   in a situation like this  we certainly hope you    ll notify  us  Please call us at 1 800 762 2737  or write     Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center  P O  Box 33172  Detroit  MI 48232 5172    In Canada  please call us at 1 800 263 3777  English   or 1 800 263 7854  French   Or  write     General Motors of Canada Limited  Customer Communication Centre  163 005  1908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario L1H 8P7    8 11    SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION    Service Manuals    Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair  information on engines  transmission  axle  suspension   brakes  electrical  steering  body  etc     RETAIL SELL PRICE   120 00    Transmission  Transaxle  Transfer Case  Unit Repair Manual  This manual provides information on unit repair    service procedures  adjustments and specifications  for GM transmissions  transaxles and transfer cases     RETAIL SELL PRICE   
83. Automatic Headlamp Control   Daytime Running Lamps  DRL  can make it easier for  others to see the front of your vehicle during the day   DRL can be helpful in many different driving  conditions  but they can be especially helpful in the  short periods after dawn and before sunset  Fully  functional daytime running lamps are required on all  vehicles first sold in Canada     A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the  DRL work  so be sure it isn   t covered     The DRL system will make your low beam headlamps  come on at a reduced brightness when the following  conditions are met       The ignition is on      the exterior lamps control is off    e  the transaxle is not in PARK  P  and  e    the parking brake is released     2 56    When the DRL are on  only your low beam headlamps   at a reduced brightness  will be on  The taillamps   sidemarker and other lamps won   t be on  Your  instrument panel won   t be lit up either     When it   s dark enough outside  your headlamps will  change to full brightness  The other lamps that come on  with your headlamps will also come on     When it   s bright enough outside  the headlamps will go  out  and your low beam headlamps will change to the  reduced brightness of DRL     To idle your vehicle with the DRL off  set the parking  brake while the ignition is in OFF or LOCK  Then start  your vehicle  The DRL will stay off until you shift out  of PARK  P  and release the parking brake     As with any vehicle  you should turn 
84. Be careful not to spill brake fluid  on your vehicle  If you do  wash it off  immediately  See    Appearance Care    in  the Index        Brake Wear  Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes     Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that   make a high pitched warning sound when the brake  pads are worn and new pads are needed  The sound   may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is  moving  except when you are pushing on the brake  pedal firmly      The brake wear warning sound means that soon    your brakes won   t work well  That could lead to  an accident  When you hear the brake wear  warning sound  have your vehicle serviced        NOTICE     Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads  could result in costly brake repair        Some driving conditions or climates may cause a   brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly  applied  This does not mean something is wrong with  your brakes     Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  prevent brake pulsation  When tires are rotated  inspect  brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the  proper sequence to GM torque specifications     Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  axle sets     See    Brake System Inspection    in Section 7  of this manual under Part C    Periodic  Maintenance Inspections        6 37    Brake Pedal Travel    See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to  normal height  or if there is a rapid increase in pedal  travel  This 
85. But you must use the  right kind  This part explains what kind of oil to use  For  engine oil crankcase capacity  see    Capacities and  Specifications    in the Index     NOTICE     Don   t add too much oil  If your engine has so    much oil that the oil level gets above the  cross hatched area that shows the proper  operating range  your engine could be damaged           3800 V6 or 3800 V6  Supercharged Engine    3100 V6 Engine    The engine oil fill cap is located on the front of the  engine  near the center of the engine compartment and  the yellow looped engine oil dipstick  See    Engine  Compartment Overview    in the Index for more  information on location     Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in  the proper operating range  Push the dipstick all the way  back in when you    re through     6 15    What Kind of Engine Oil to Use    Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by  looking for the starburst symbol     This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by  the American Petroleum Institute  API   Do not use any  oil which does not carry this starburst symbol     If you change your own oil   be sure you use oil that has  the starburst symbol on the  front of the oil container  If  you have your oil changed  for you  be sure the oil put  into your engine is  American Petroleum  Institute certified for  gasoline engines        You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your  vehicle  as shown in the following chart     6 16 
86. CHECK ENGINE light to come on   Modifications to these systems could lead to  costly repairs not covered by your warranty  This  may also result in a failure to pass a required  Emission Inspection Maintenance test        2 85    This light should come on  as a check to show you it is  working  when the ignition is on and the engine is not  running  If the light doesn   t come on  have it repaired   This light will also come on during a malfunction in one  of two ways     e Light Flashing    A misfire condition has been  detected  A misfire increases vehicle emissions and  may damage the emission control system on your  vehicle  Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis  and service may be required        Light On Steady    An emission control system  malfunction has been detected on your vehicle   Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and  service may be required     If the Light Is Flashing    The following may prevent more serious damage to  your vehicle       Reducing vehicle speed       Avoiding hard accelerations      Avoiding steep uphill grades   e    If you are towing a trailer  reduce the amount of  cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible     2 86    If the light stops flashing and remains on steady  see    If  the Light Is On Steady    following     If the light continues to flash  when it is safe to do so   stop the vehicle  Find a safe place to park your vehicle   Turn the key off  wait at least 10 seconds and restart the  engine  If the light rema
87. Certified For Gasoline Engines  starburst symbol  Failure to use the  recommended oil can result in engine damage not  covered by your warranty        GM Goodwrench   oil meets all the requirements for  your vehicle     If you are in an area where the temperature falls   below  20  F   29  C   consider using either an   SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil  Both  will provide easier cold starting and better protection for  your engine at extremely low temperatures     Engine Oil Additives    Don   t add anything to your oil  The recommended oils  with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good  performance and engine protection     6 18    When to Change Engine Oil   GM Oil Life System         Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know  when to change the engine oil and filter  This is based on  engine revolutions and engine temperature  and not on  mileage  Based on driving conditions  the mileage at  which an oil change will be indicated can vary  considerably  For the oil life system to work properly   you must reset the system every time the oil is changed     When the system has calculated that oil life has been  diminished  it will indicate that an oil change is  necessary  A CHANGE OIL SOON light will come on   Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two  times you stop for fuel  It is possible that  if you are  driving under the best conditions  the oil life system  may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over  a yea
88. D  Dolby   Press this pushbutton to reduce  background noise  The double D symbol will appear on  the display     Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license  from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation  Dolby  and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  Laboratories Licensing Corporation     5 REV  Reverse   Press this pushbutton to reverse the  tape rapidly  Press it again to return to playing speed   The radio will play the last selected station while the  tape reverses  You may select stations during reverse  operation by using SEEK or TUNE     6 FWD  Forward   Press this pushbutton to advance  quickly to another part of the tape  Press the pushbutton  again to return to playing speed  The radio will play the  last selected station while the tape advances  You may  select stations during forward operation by using SEEK  or TUNE     AM FM  Press this button to listen to the radio when a  tape is playing   TAPE PLAY  Press this button to change to playing a    tape when listening to the radio  The tape symbol with an  arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active      amp  EJECT  Press this button to stop a tape when it is  playing and to remove a tape when it is not playing  The  eject button may be activated with either the ignition or  radio off  Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and  ignition off if this button is pressed first     Cassette Tape Messages    E  Error   If this message and a number appears  while trying to play a cassette 
89. E     We recommend you use only fluid labeled  DEXRON   III  because fluid with that label is    made especially for your automatic transaxle   Damage caused by fluid other than  DEXRON   III is not covered by your new  vehicle warranty          After adding fluid  recheck the fluid level as    described under    How to Check          When the correct fluid level is obtained  push the    dipstick back in all the way     Engine Coolant    The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with  DEX COOL        engine coolant  This coolant is designed  to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles   240 000 km   whichever occurs first  if you add only  DEX COOL        extended life coolant     The following explains your cooling system and how to  add coolant when it is low  If you have a problem with  engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your  radiator  see    Engine Overheating    in the Index     A 50 50 mixture of clean  drinkable water and  DEX COOL   coolant will        Give freezing protection down to  34  F   37  C       Give boiling protection up to 265  F  129  C      Protect against rust and corrosion      Help keep the proper engine temperature      Let the warning lights and gages work as  they should     NOTICE     When adding coolant  it is important that you  use only DEX COOL    silicate free  coolant   If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to  the system  premature engine  heater core or  radiator corrosion may result  In addition  the  eng
90. If an error appears on the display  see    Compact Disc  Messages    later in this section     1 PREV  Previous   Press this pushbutton or the SEEK  down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more  than eight seconds have played  If you hold the  pushbutton or press it more than once  the player will  continue moving back through the disc     2 NEXT  Press this pushbutton or the SEEK up arrow to  go to the start of the next track  If you hold the  pushbutton or press it more than once  the player will  continue moving forward through the disc     3 RDM  Random   Press this pushbutton to hear the  tracks in random  rather than sequential  order  The  display will show RDM  Press RDM again to turn off  random play     5 REV  Reverse   Press and hold this pushbutton to  quickly reverse within a track  You will hear sound at a  reduced volume  The display will show elapsed time     6 FWD  Forward   Press and hold this pushbutton to  quickly advance forward within a track  You will hear  sound at a reduced volume  The display will show  elapsed time     RECALL  Press this button to see what track is currently  playing  Press it again within five seconds to see how long  the track has been playing  When a new track starts to  play  the track number will also appear  Press it a third  time and the time of day will be displayed     AM FM  Press this button to listen to the radio  when a disc is playing  The disc will stop but remain in  the player     CD PLAY  Press this b
91. To  prevent torque lock  set the parking brake and then shift  into PARK  P  properly before you leave the driver   s  seat  To find out how  see    Shifting Into PARK  P     in  the Index     When you are ready to drive  move the shift lever out of  PARK  P  before you release the parking brake     If torque lock does occur  you may need to have another  vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the  pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle  so you  can pull the shift lever out of PARK  P      2 46    Shifting Out of PARK  P     Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock  control system  You must fully apply your regular  brakes before you can shift from PARK  P  when the  ignition is in RUN  See    Automatic Transaxle  Operation    in the Index     If you cannot shift out of PARK  P   ease pressure on  the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK  P   while keeping the brake pedal down  Release the shift  lever button  Then move the shift lever out of PARK  P    being sure to press the shift lever button     Parking Over Things That Burn          Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust    parts under your vehicle and ignite  Don   t park  over papers  leaves  dry grass or other things that  can burn        Engine Exhaust    Engine exhaust can kill  It contains the gas  carbon monoxide  CO   which you can   t see or  smell  It can cause unconsciousness and death     You might have exhaust coming in if     Your exhaust system sounds strange
92. Uniform Tire Quality Grading  system does not apply to deep tread  winter type snow  tires  space saver or temporary use spare tires  tires with  nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches  25 to 30 cm    or to some limited production tires     While the tires available on General Motors passenger  cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these  grades  they must also conform to federal safety  requirements and additional General Motors Tire  Performance Criteria  TPC  standards     6 54    Treadwear    The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  conditions on a specified government test course    For example  a tire graded 150 would wear one and   a half  1 1 2  times as well on the government course  as a tire graded 100  The relative performance of tires  depends upon the actual conditions of their use   however  and may depart significantly from the norm  due to variations in driving habits  service practices and  differences in road characteristics and climate     Traction    AA  A  B  C    The traction grades  from highest to lowest  are AA    A  B  and C  Those grades represent the tire   s ability   to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled  conditions on specified government test surfaces of  asphalt and concrete  A tire marked C may have poor  traction performance  Warning  The traction grade  assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking  traction tests  and does not include
93. a very low charge or is dead  you  may not be able to remove the ignition key from the  ignition switch or shift out of PARK  P   Refer to     Shifting Out of PARK P     in the Index     Vehicle Storage    If you   re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days  or more  remove the black  negative     cable from  the battery  This will help keep your battery from  running down     Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas    that can explode  You can be badly hurt if you  aren   t careful  See    Jump Starting    in the Index  for tips on working around a battery without  getting hurt        Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle  for longer storage periods     Also  for your audio system  see    Theft Deterrent  Feature    in the Index     6 39    Bulb Replacement Headlamps    For the proper type of replacement bulb  see 1  Open the hood        Replacement Bulbs    in the Index   2  Remove the two bolts    from the top of the  headlamp assembly     For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this  section  contact your dealer     Halogen Bulbs    Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and       can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb  You or  others could be injured  Be sure to read and  follow the instructions on the bulb package        6 40       3  Carefully remove the headlamp assembly from the  vehicle  Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping  the paint on the vehicle while removing     4  Lift the plastic tab on the electrical connector 
94. action System or the Traction  Control System stops limiting wheel spin  See     Enhanced Traction System    or    Traction Control  System    in the Index     The low traction light also comes on briefly when you  turn the ignition key to RUN  If the light doesn   t come  on then  have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when  the Traction Control System or Enhanced Traction  System is active     Engine Coolant Temperature Light    This light tells tells you that  the engine coolant has  overheated or the radiator  cooling fan is not working     TEMP    If you have been operating the vehicle under normal  driving conditions  you should pull of the road  stop the  vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible     See    Engine Overheating    in the Index     2 83    Engine Coolant Temperature Gage       United States Canada    Your vehicle has a gage that shows the engine coolant  temperature  If the gage pointer moves into the shaded  area  the engine is too hot     That reading means the same thing as the warning light     It means that the engine coolant has overheated  If you  have been operating the vehicle under normal  conditions  you should pull off the road  stop the  vehicle  and turn off the engine as soon as possible     See    Engine Overheating    in the Index     2 84    Low Coolant Warning Light    If this light comes on   the system is low on  coolant and the engine  may overheat     LOW  COOLANT    See    Engine Coolant    in the Index and have th
95. advanced  electronic braking system that will help prevent a  braking skid     When you start your engine  or when you begin to drive  away  your anti lock brake system will check itself  You  may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while  this test is going on  and you may even notice that your  brake pedal moves or pulses a little  This is normal           If there   s a problem with the  anti lock brake system  this  warning light will stay on   See    Anti Lock Brake  System Warning Light    in  the Index        Let   s say the road is wet and you   re driving safely   Suddenly  an animal jumps out in front of you  You slam  on the brakes and continue braking  Here   s what  happens with ABS     A computer senses that wheels are slowing down  If one  of the wheels is about to stop rolling  the computer will  separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at  both rear wheels     The anti lock system can change the brake pressure  faster than any driver could  The computer is  programmed to make the most of available tire and road  conditions  This can help you steer around the obstacle  while braking hard        As you brake  your computer keeps receiving updates on  wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly     Remember  Anti lock doesn   t change the time you need  to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease  stopping distance  If you get too close to the vehicle in  front of you  you won   t have time to apply your brakes  if that veh
96. aler if you need a new key made     Your vehicle has the PASS Key    TI vehicle theft  system  The key has a transponder in the key head that  matches a decoder in the vehicle   s steering column  If a  replacement key or an additional key is needed  it must  be purchased from your dealer  The key will have PK3  stamped on it     Any new PASS   Key   IMI key must be programmed  before it will start your vehicle  See    PASS   Key   Til     in the Index for more information on programming your  new key     In an emergency  contact Pontiac Roadside Assistance   See    Roadside Assistance    in the Index for  more information     NOTICE     Your vehicle has a number of features that can  help prevent theft  But you can have a lot of  trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock  your key inside  You may even have to damage  your vehicle to get in  So be sure you have an  extra key        If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with  an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the  vehicle  OnStar may be able to send a command to  unlock your vehicle  See    OnStar    in the Index for  more information     Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle     To lock or unlock your vehicle from the outside   use your key or remote keyless entry transmitter   if equipped      Unlocked doors can be dangerous        Passengers    especially children    can  easily open the doors and fall out of a  moving vehicle  When a door is locked  the  
97. and  pull the connector out     5  Turn the lamp socket ring a quarter turn  counterclockwise to remove it from the  headlamp assembly        6 42    6  Pull the old bulb from the socket     7  Place the new bulb into the socket     8  Turn the lamp socket ring a quarter turn clockwise    10     11     12     to place it back into the headlamp assembly       Lift the plastic tab on the electrical connector and    reinstall the connector     Carefully reinstall the headlamp assembly  Be  careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on  the vehicle while reinstalling the assembly     Reinstall the two bolts on the top of the  headlamp assembly     Close the hood     Headlamp Aiming    The aim of your vehicle   s headlamps can be adjusted by  using aim tips located on the outer surface of the lens   The aim has been pre set at the factory and should need  no further adjustment     If your vehicle is damaged in an accident  the headlamp  aim may be affected  Aim adjustment to the low beam  may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers   for horizontal aim   or if oncoming drivers flash their  high beams at you  for vertical aim   If you believe your  headlamps need to be re aimed  it is recommended that  you take your vehicle to the dealer for assistance     Front Turn Signal and Front Sidemarker  1  Open the hood        2  Remove the two bolts from the top of the  headlamp assembly     3  Remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle   Be careful to avoid scratchi
98. and how quickly the vehicle slows down  in frontal or near frontal impacts     What makes an air bag inflate     In an impact of sufficient severity  the air bag sensing  system detects that the vehicle is in a crash  The sensing  system triggers a release of gas from the inflator  which  inflates the air bag  The inflator  air bag and related  hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the  steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the  right front passenger     How does an air bag restrain     In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions   even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or  the instrument panel  Air bags supplement the protection  provided by safety belts  Air bags distribute the force of  the impact more evenly over the occupant   s upper body   stopping the occupant more gradually  But air bags  would not help you in many types of collisions   including rollovers  rear impacts and many side impacts   primarily because an occupant   s motion is not toward  those air bags  Air bags should never be regarded as  anything more than a supplement to safety belts    and then only in moderate to severe frontal or  near frontal collisions     1 25    What will you see after an air bag inflates  In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag   windshields are broken by vehicle deformation   Additional windshield breakage may also occur from    the right front passenger air bag     After an air bag inflates  it quickly defl
99. ansaxle to limit wheel spin     This light will come on  when your Enhanced  Traction System is limiting  wheel spin  See    Enhanced  Traction System Warning  Light    in the Index     LOW  TRAC    If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced  traction system begins to limit wheel spin  the cruise  control will automatically disengage  When road  conditions allow you to safely use it again  you may  re engage the cruise control  See    Cruise Control    in  the Index     The Enhanced Traction System operates in all transaxle  shift lever positions  But the system can upshift the  transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you    ve  chosen  so you should use the lower gears only when  necessary  See    Automatic Transaxle    in the Index     This TRAC OFF warning  light will come on to let you  know if there   s a problem     TRAC  OFF    See    Enhanced Traction System Warning Light    in the  Index  When this warning light is on  the system will not  limit wheel spin  Adjust your driving accordingly     To limit wheel spin  especially in slippery road  conditions  you should always leave the Enhanced  Traction System on  But you can turn the system off if  you ever need to  You should turn the system off if your  vehicle ever gets stuck in sand  mud or snow and  rocking the vehicle is required  See    Rocking Your  Vehicle    in the Index     4 11    To turn the system on or  off  press the TRAC button  on the far right end of the  Driver Information Cent
100. are not  damaged  If the inside surface is damaged  it could  interfere with radio reception     NOTICE     Do not try to clear frost or other material from  the inside of the rear window with a razor blade  or anything else that is sharp  This may damage  the rear defogger grid and affect your radio   s  ability to pick up stations clearly  The repairs  wouldn   t be covered by your warranty        Because this antenna is built into your rear window   there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes  and vandals     If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your vehicle   and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass  be sure  that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM FM  antenna  There is enough space between the lines to  attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering  with radio reception     3 21    y Section 4 Your Driving and the Road       Here yov   ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions   We    ve also included many other useful tips on driving     4 2 Defensive Driving 4 18 Driving at Night   4 3 Drunken Driving 4 20 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads   4 6 Control of a Vehicle 4 24 City Driving   4 6 Braking 4 25 Freeway Driving   4 9 Traction Control System 4 26 Before Leaving on a Long Trip   With 3800 Supercharged V6 Engine  4 27 Highway Hypnosis   4 11 Enhanced Traction System  ETS  4 28 Hill and Mountain Roads   3100 V6 or 3800 V6 Engine  4 29 Winter Driving   4 12 Steering 4 
101. arther you can travel with  the fuel you have remaining in the gas tank before  refueling  When the range displays L  for 40 to 50 miles   64 36 to 80 45 km   the display will flash LOW  continuously  The range is calculated from the AVG  ECON value multiplied by the fuel remaining in   the tank     LOW  This light will come on the vehicle outline when  the ignition is on and the fluid in the washer fluid  container is low     DOOR AJAR  If one of the doors is left ajar  a light  will appear next to that door on the vehicle outline     BOOST GAGE  If you have the 3800 V6 supercharged  engine  this gage will show the amount of boost the  engine is receiving     TRUNK AJAR  If the trunk is not fully closed  the  trunk area will light up on the vehicle outline     LOW TRAC  Low Traction   This light will come on  when the enhanced traction system  3100 or 3800 V6  engine  or the traction control system  3800  supercharged V6 engine  is limiting wheel spin  See     Traction Control System       Enhanced Traction System     and    Low Traction Light    in the Index     2 95    TRAC OFF  Traction Off  or TCS OFF  Traction  Control System Off   This light lets you know that the  enhanced traction system  3100 or 3800 V6 engine  or  the traction control system  3800 supercharged V6  engine  has been disabled and will not limit wheel spin   See    Traction Control System Warning Light         Enhanced Traction System Warning Light    and    Low  Traction Light    in the Index     TRAC
102. ater will not get in        5  Check the transmitter operation     2 13    Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices    Your vehicle   s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features  The features you can  program depend on the options that came with your vehicle  The following chart shows the features that can be  programmed  To determine which features your vehicle is equipped with  follow the steps listed for entering the  programming mode        Feature    Number Delayed Automatic   Last Door Remote  Remote Content   Content  of Chimes   Illumina     Door Locks  Closed Drivers   Lock  Theft  Sounded   tion  Locking  Door Unlock Arming   Exit Lockout Unlock   Confirma    Disarming  Lighting Deterrent                         2 14    Entering Programming Mode    To program features  your vehicle must be in this  programming mode  Follow these steps     1  Turn the ignition key to LOCK or OFF     2  Remove the MALL PGM fuse from the instrument  panel fuse block  See    Fuses and Circuit Breakers     in the Index     3  Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY     4  Count the number of chimes you hear  You will hear  up to four chimes  depending on vehicle content  See     Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices     earlier in this section     You can now program your choices  After programming  a feature  you can exit the programming mode at  any time     Exiting Programming Mode    To exit programming mode  turn the key from  ACCESSORY t
103. ates  so quickly that  some people may not even realize the air bag inflated   Some components of the air bag module    the steering  wheel hub for the driver   s air bag  or the instrument panel e  for the right front passenger   s bag    will be hot for a short   time  The parts of the bag that come into contact with you   may be warm  but not too hot to touch  There will be    Air bags are designed to inflate only once  After they  inflate  you    ll need some new parts for your air bag  system  If you don   t get them  the air bag system  won   t be there to help protect you in another crash     some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated  air bags  Air bag inflation doesn   t prevent the driver from  seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle  nor does it  stop people from leaving the vehicle     When an air bag inflates  there is dust in the air   This dust could cause breathing problems for  people with a history of asthma or other    breathing trouble  To avoid this  everyone in the  vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so   If you have breathing problems but can   t get out  of the vehicle after an air bag inflates  then get  fresh air by opening a window or door        1 26    A new system will include air bag modules and  possibly other parts  The service manual for your  vehicle covers the need to replace other parts     Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and  diagnostic module  which records information about  the air bag sy
104. automatically  dims to the proper level to minimize glare from  headlamps behind your after dark     The mirror has an eight point compass and temperature  display in the upper right corner of the mirror face  The  display shows the current outside temperature and the  vehicle   s current direction     Automatic Dimming Feature       The automatic dimming feature is turned on or off by  briefly pressing the COMP button located on the bottom  of the mirror face  A light on the mirror will be lit when  the feature is turned on  It will go out when the feature is  turned off     Temperature Display    The TEMP button located on the bottom of the mirror  face changes the temperature display  You can select   F     C  or turn the display off     Compass Operation    Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass  on or off  When on  the display will show the compass  direction  with a maximum of two characters  For  example  NE is displayed for north east     Compass Calibration    Press and hold the COMP button down for six seconds  to activate the compass calibration mode  If your vehicle  has the optional mirror with the compass  temperature  display and OnStar system  press the on off button   for nine seconds     CAL will be displayed in the compass temperature  window on the mirror     The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways       Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph  8 km h  or  less until CAL is no longer displayed in the  compass window       Drive the ve
105. bags  to help provide traction  Be sure you properly secure  these items in your vehicle        Most of the time  those places where your tires meet the  road probably have good traction     However  if there is snow or ice between your tires  and the road  you can have a very slippery situation   You    ll have a lot less traction or    grip    and will need  to be very careful        What   s the worst time for this     Wet ice     Very cold  snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on  But wet  ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the  least traction of all  You can get wet ice when it   s about  freezing  32  F  0  C  and freezing rain begins to fall   Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews  can get there     Whatever the condition    smooth ice  packed  blowing  or loose snow    drive with caution     If you have traction control  keep the system on  It will  improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a  slippery road  Even though your vehicle has a traction  control system  you   ll want to slow down and adjust  your driving to the road conditions  See    Traction  Control System    in the Index     If you don   t have the traction control system  accelerate  gently  Try not to break the fragile traction  If you  accelerate too fast  the drive wheels will spin and polish  the surface under the tires even more     Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle   s stability  when you make a hard stop on a slippery road  Even  though 
106. be careful     4 32    Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle   This can cause deadly CO  carbon monoxide  gas  to get inside  CO could overcome you and kill  you  You can   t see it or smell it  so you might not  know it is in your vehicle  Clear away snow from    around the base of your vehicle  especially any  that is blocking your exhaust pipe  And check  around again from time to time to be sure snow  doesn   t collect there    Open a window just a little on the side of the  vehicle that   s away from the wind  This will help  keep CO out        Run your engine only as long as you must  This saves  fuel  When you run the engine  make it go a little faster  than just idle  That is  push the accelerator slightly  This  uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the  battery charged  You will need a well charged battery to  restart the vehicle  and possibly for signaling later on  with your headlamps  Let the heater run for a while     Then  shut the engine off and close the window almost  all the way to preserve the heat  Start the engine again  and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable  from the cold  But do it as little as possible  Preserve the  fuel as long as you can  To help keep warm  you can get  out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises  every half hour or so until help comes     4 33    Recreational Vehicle Towing    Recreational vehicle towing means towing your  vehicle behind another vehicle    such as behind a  m
107. becomes cloudy  or if you turn  on your headlamps  you may need to adjust the HUD  brightness again  Polarized sunglasses could make the  HUD image harder to see     Push the ENG MET button  on the trip calculator   located above the audio  controls on the trip  computer  if equipped  on  the instrument panel  to    ENG ME    switch the HUD display  from English to metric or  metric to English     If your vehicle is not equipped with the trip calculator   you cannot change the display     Care of the Head Up Display       Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove  any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of  the HUD image     To clean the HUD  spray household glass cleaner on a    soft  clean cloth  Wipe the HUD lens gently  then dry it     Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the  cleaner could leak into the unit     If You Can   t See the HUD Image When the Ignition  Is On    e  Is anything covering the HUD unit       Is the HUD dimmer setting bright enough       Is the HUD image adjusted to the proper height       Still no HUD image  Check the fuse in the  instrument panel fuse block  See    Fuses and Circuit  Breakers    in the Index    If the HUD Image Is Not Clear     Is the HUD image too bright    e  Are the windshield and HUD lens clean     The windshield is part of the HUD system  If you ever  need a new windshield  be sure to get one designed for  HUD  If you don   t  the HUD image may look blurred  and out of focus     2 99  
108. button on the buckle is  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle  the safety belt quickly if you ever had to        5  To make the lap part tight  pull down on the buckle  end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt     1 14       Qy    3         KS       EZ  i    K       N  Ny    DN  yy   xs                      The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  the hips  just touching the thighs  In a crash  this applies  force to the strong pelvic bones  And you d be less likely  to slide under the lap belt  If you slid under it  the belt  would apply force at your abdomen  This could cause  serious or even fatal injuries  The shoulder belt should   go over the shoulder and across the chest  These parts   of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces     The safety belt locks if there   s a sudden stop or crash   or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor     Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster  Four Door Models     Before you begin to drive  move the shoulder belt  adjuster to the height that is right for you        To move it down  squeeze the release lever and the  shoulder belt guide as shown and move the height  adjuster to the desired position  You can move the  adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt  guide  After you move the adjuster to where you  want it  try to move it down without squeezing the  release lever to make sure it has locked into position     Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the  bel
109. c Door Locks  see    Locks and Lighting  Choices    in the Index  to unlock the doors when the  shift lever is shifted into PARK  P   then the doors will  automatically unlock for you  Also  the doors will  automatically lock when you move your shift lever out  of PARK  P  with the ignition on     If you don   t want the doors to unlock automatically  when you turn the ignition off  see    Locks and Lighting  Choices    in the Index     Rear Door Security Locks   Four Door Models     Four door vehicles are equipped with rear door security  locks that help prevent passengers from opening the rear  doors of your vehicle from the inside  To use one of  these locks do the following     1  Open one of the rear doors     2  On the inside of the  rear door will be a lock  with this label  Slide the  lever located next to  the label upward to  engage the lock          ul payun                 3  Close the door     4  Repeat the procedure on the other rear door lock     To disengage the lock s   reverse the steps     The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from  inside the vehicle when this feature is in use  If you want  to open a rear door when the security lock is on  unlock  the door from the inside and then open the door from   the outside     Lockout Prevention    The lockout deterrent feature makes it difficult for you  to lock your keys in the vehicle  If the driver   s door is  open while the keys are in the ignition  you will not be  able to use your power door lock 
110. c dimming rearview  mirror with a compass and temperature display and the  OnStar system     When turned on  this mirror functions exactly like the  electrochromic mirror described previously  See     Mirrors  Electrochromic Rearview    in the Index for  more information     The mirror also has an eight point compass and  temperature display in the upper right corner on the  mirror face and a three button OnStar system     O   The button with this symbol is the on off button for  the mirror functions such as automatic dimming and  temperature display  It is the far left button located on  the lower part of the mirror face     Automatic Dimming Feature    The automatic dimming feature is turned on and off by  pressing the far left button  located on the lower part of  the mirror face  for up to three seconds  A light on the  mirror will be lit when the feature is turned on  It will go  out when the feature is turned off     Temperature Display    The ON OFF button located on far left on the bottom of  the mirror face changes the temperature display  You can  select   F    C  or turn the display off     Compass Operation    There is a compass display in the window in the upper  right corner of the mirror face  The compass displays a  maximum of two characters  For example  NE is  displayed for north east     The compass may need to be calibrated  See    Compass  Calibration    in the Index for more information           The other three buttons are for the OnStar system    See y
111. can be  badly damaged  The costly repairs would not be  covered by your warranty  See       Overheated  Engine Protection Operating Mode    in the Index        If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine    An overheat warning  along with a low coolant light   can indicate a serious problem  See    Low Coolant  Light    in the Index     If you get an engine overheat warning with no low  coolant light  but see or hear no steam  the problem may  not be too serious  Sometimes the engine can get a little  too hot when you       Climb a long hill on a hot day      Stop after high speed driving     Idle for long periods in traffic   e    Tow a trailer     If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam   try this for a minute or so     1  If your air conditioner is on  turn it off     2  Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan  speed and open the window as necessary     3  If you   re in a traffic jam  shift to NEUTRAL  N    otherwise  shift to the highest gear while  driving    AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  D   or THIRD  3      If you no longer have the overheat warning  you can  drive  Just to be safe  drive slower for about 10 minutes   If the warning doesn   t come back on  you can   drive normally     If the warning continues  pull over  stop  and park your  vehicle right away     If there   s still no sign of steam  idle the engine for three  minutes while you   re parked  If you still have the  warning  turn off the engine and get everyone out of the  vehicle until it coo
112. ccelerate  briefly  You ll go right  back up to your chosen speed and stay there     Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control  There are two ways to go to a higher speed       Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed   Push in the SET button  then release the button  and the accelerator pedal  You    ll now cruise at the  higher speed       Move the cruise switch from ON to R A  Hold it  there until you get up to the speed you want  and  then release the switch  To increase your speed in  very small amounts  move the switch to R A briefly  and then release it  Each time you do this  your  vehicle will go about 1 mph  1 6 km h  faster     The accelerate feature will only work after you set the  cruise control speed by pushing the SET button     2 53    Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control    There are two ways to reduce your speed while using  cruise control        Push in the SET button until you reach the lower  speed you want  then release it       To slow down in very small amounts  push the SET  button briefly  Each time you do this  yov    ll go about  1 mph  1 6 km h  slower     Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control    Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed  When  you take your foot off the pedal  the vehicle will slow  down to the cruise control speed you set earlier     2 54    Using Cruise Control on Hills    How well the cruise control will work on hills depends  upon your speed  load and the steepness of the hills   When g
113. ce or neck  The lap belt should fit  snugly below the hips  just touching the top of the  thighs  It should never be worn over the abdomen   which could cause severe or even fatal internal  injuries in a crash     Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  are restrained in the rear seat     In acrash  children who are not buckled up can strike  other people who are buckled up  or can be thrown  out of the vehicle  Older children need to use safety  belts properly        Older children who have outgrown booster seats should  wear the vehicle   s safety belts     If you have the choice  a child should sit next to a  window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and  get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide     1 51    Never do this    Here two children are wearing the same belt   The belt can   t properly spread the impact forces   In a crash  the two children can be crushed    together and seriously injured  A belt must be  used by only one person at a time     but the child is so small that the shoulder belt i is  very close to the child   s face or neck        A  Move the child toward the center of the vehicle   but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the  child   s shoulder  so that in a crash the child   s upper  body would have the restraint that belts provide  If  the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position   see    Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides    in the  Index  If the child is so small that the shoulder belt  is stil
114. certain conditions     Cleaning Interior Plastic Components    Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft  cloth or sponge  Commercial cleaners may affect the  surface finish     Care of Safety Belts  Keep belts clean and dry     Do not bleach or dye safety belts  If you do  it    may severely weaken them  In a crash  they  might not be able to provide adequate protection   Clean safety belts only with mild soap and  lukewarm water        Cleaning Glass Surfaces    Glass should be cleaned often  GM Glass Cleaner or a  liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal  tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass  See     Appearance Care and Materials    in the Index     NOTICE     Don   t use abrasive cleaners on glass  because they  may cause scratches  Avoid placing decals on the  inside rear window  since they may have to be  scraped off later  If abrasive cleaners are used on  the inside of the rear window  an electric  defogger element may be damaged  Any  temporary license should not be attached across  the defogger grid        6 61    Cleaning the Outside of the  Windshield and Wiper Blades    If the windshield is not clear after using the  windshield washer  or if the wiper blade chatters  when running  wax  sap or other material may be  on the blade or windshield     Clean the outside of the windshield with a full strength  glass cleaning liquid  The windshield is clean if beads  do not form when you rinse it with water     Grime from the windshield will sti
115. ch fuel is in your tank and many other things you need to drive safely  and economically     SECURITY        SERVICE  ENGINE SOON       as j E  COW DIL    Q 10 8 260    RPM x1000   21  BRAKE  O o   160    TEMP    APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK    o           United States Version Shown  Canada Similar    2 76    Your vehicle is equipped with this cluster or one very  similar to it  It includes indicator warning lights and  gages that are explained on the following pages  Be sure  to read about them     Speedometer and Odometer    The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles  per hour  mph  and kilometers per hour  km h   The  odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven in  either miles  used in the United States  or in kilometers   used in Canada      The vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer  If you see  silver lines between the numbers  you    ll know someone  has probably tampered with it and the numbers may not  be correct     You may wonder what happens if the vehicle needs a  new odometer installed  If the new one can be set to the  mileage total of the old odometer  then that will be done   If it can   t  then it will be set at zero and a label must be  put on the driver   s door to show the old mileage reading  when the new odometer was installed     Trip Odometer    The trip odometer tells how far you have driven since  you last reset it  To set it to zero  press the reset button  located to the right of the instrument panel cluster     Tachometer  
116. ch on your turn signal   check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as  often as necessary  Try to blend smoothly with the  traffic flow     Once you are on the freeway  adjust your speed to the  posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it   s slower  Stay  in the right lane unless you want to pass     Before changing lanes  check your mirrors  Then use  your turn signal     Just before you leave the lane  glance quickly over your  shoulder to make sure there isn   t another vehicle in your     blind    spot     4 25    Once you are moving on the freeway  make certain you  allow a reasonable following distance  Expect to move  slightly slower at night     When you want to leave the freeway  move to the proper  lane well in advance  If you miss your exit  do not   under any circumstances  stop and back up  Drive on to  the next exit     The exit ramp can be curved  sometimes quite sharply   The exit speed is usually posted     Reduce your speed according to your speedometer  not  to your sense of motion  After driving for any distance  at higher speeds  you may tend to think you are going  slower than you actually are     4 26    Before Leaving on a Long Trip    Make sure you    re ready  Try to be well rested  If you  must start when you   re not fresh    such as after a day   s  work    don   t plan to make too many miles that first part  of the journey  Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you  can easily drive in     Is your vehicle ready for a long trip  If you keep
117. chever occurs first     What Kind of Oil to Use    Use only the recommended supercharger oil  See     Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    in the Index     6 21    How to Check and Add Oil    Park the vehicle on a level surface  Check oil only when  the engine is cold  Allow the engine to cool two to three  hours after running     If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug while    the engine is hot  pressure may cause hot oil to  blow out of the oil fill hole  You may be burned   Do not remove the plug until the engine cools        1  Clean the area around the oil fill plug before  removing it     2  Remove the oil fill plug using a 3 16 inch  Allen wrench     3  The oil level is correct when it just reaches the  bottom of the threads of the inspection hole     4  Replace the oil plug with the O ring in place   Tighten to 88 lb in  10 N m      6 22    Automatic Transaxle Fluid  When to Check and Change    A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid  level is when the engine oil is changed     Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles   83 000 km  if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or  more of these conditions       In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature  regularly reaches 90  F  32  C  or higher       In hilly or mountainous terrain     When doing frequent trailer towing     Uses such as found in taxi  police or delivery service     If you do not use your vehicle under any of  these conditions  change the fluid and filter  at 100 000 m
118. ck is weak and its head weighs so much    compared with the rest of its body  In a crash   an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the  restraint  so the crash forces can be distributed  across the strongest part of an infant   s body  the  back and shoulders  Infants always should be  secured in appropriate infant restraints        1 38    The body structure of a young child is quite  unlike that of an adult or older child  for whom  the safety belts are designed  A young child   s hip  bones are still so small that the vehicle   s regular    safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones   as it should  Instead  it may settle up around the  child   s abdomen  In a crash  the belt would apply  force on a body area that   s unprotected by any  bony structure  This alone could cause serious or  fatal injuries  Young children always should be  secured in appropriate child restraints        Restraint Systems for Children       An infant car bed  A   a special bed made for use in a  motor vehicle  is an infant restraint system designed to  restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface   Make sure that the infant   s head rests toward the center  of the vehicle        A rear facing infant seat  B  provides restraint with  the seating surface against the back of the infant    The harness system holds the infant in place and  in a  crash  acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint     1 39       A forward facing child seat  C E  provides restraint for  the
119. ck to the wiper  blades and affect their performance  Clean the blade  by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in  full strength windshield washer solvent  Then   rinse the blade with water     Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary   replace blades that look worn     Weatherstrips    Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them  last longer  seal better  and not stick or squeak   Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least  every six months  During very cold  damp weather  more frequent application may be required  See     Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    in the Index     6 62    Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle    The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty  depth  of color  gloss retention and durability     Washing Your Vehicle    The best way to preserve your vehicle   s finish is to  keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or  cold water     Don   t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun   Use a car washing soap  Don   t use strong soaps or  chemical detergents  Be sure to rinse the vehicle well   removing all soap residue completely  You can get  GM  approved cleaning products from your dealer  See     Appearance Care and Materials    in the Index  Don   t  use cleaning agents that are petroleum based  or that  contain acid or abrasives  All cleaning agents should be  flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface   or they could stain  Dry the finish with a soft  clean  chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid
120. coordination  and eyesight all play a part  So do alcohol  drugs and  frustration  But even in 3 4 of a second  a vehicle  moving at 60 mph  100 km h  travels 66 feet  20 m    That could be a lot of distance in an emergency  so  keeping enough space between your vehicle and others  is important     And  of course  actual stopping distances vary greatly  with the surface of the road  whether it   s pavement or  gravel   the condition of the road  wet  dry  icy   tire  tread  the condition of your brakes  the weight of the  vehicle and the amount of brake force applied     Avoid needless heavy braking  Some people drive in  spurts    heavy acceleration followed by heavy   braking    rather than keeping pace with traffic  This is a  mistake  Your brakes may not have time to cool between  hard stops  Your brakes will wear out much faster if you  do a lot of heavy braking  If you keep pace with the  traffic and allow realistic following distances  you will  eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking  That means  better braking and longer brake life     If your engine ever stops while you    re driving  brake  normally but don   t pump your brakes  If you do  the  pedal may get harder to push down  If your engine  stops  you will still have some power brake assist  But  you will use it when you brake  Once the power assist is  used up  it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal  will be harder to push     Anti Lock Brake System  ABS     Your vehicle has anti lock brakes  ABS is an 
121. could be a sign of brake trouble     Brake Adjustment    Every time you apply the brakes  with or without the  vehicle moving  your brakes adjust for wear     6 38    Replacing Brake System Parts    The braking system on a vehicle is complex  Its many  parts have to be of top quality and work well together if  the vehicle is to have really good braking  Your vehicle  was designed and tested with top quality GM brake  parts  When you replace parts of your braking   system    for example  when your brake linings wear  down and you need new ones put in    be sure you get  new approved GM replacement parts  If you don   t  your  brakes may no longer work properly  For example  if  someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your  vehicle  the balance between your front and rear brakes  can change    for the worse  The braking performance  you    ve come to expect can change in many other ways if  someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts     Battery    Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free  ACDelco    battery  When it   s time for a new battery   get one that has the replacement number shown on the  original battery   s label  We recommend an ACDelco  battery  See    Engine Compartment Overview    in the  Index for battery location     WARNING  Battery posts  terminals and related  accessories contain lead and lead compounds  chemicals  known to the State of California to cause cancer and  reproductive harm  Wash hands after handling     If your battery has 
122. cted more often if your driving habits or conditions  result in frequent braking            Part D  Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT    and Lubricants Hydraulic Delco Supreme 11   Brake Fluid    Fluids and lubricants identified below by name  Brake System  GM Part No  12377967 or  part number or specification may be obtained from equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid      your dealer  Windshield GM Optikleen   Washer    USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Washer Solvent   Solvent  GM Part No  1051515     Engine Oil Engine oil with the American or equivalent   Petroleum Institute Certified for Power GM Power Steering Fluid  Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Steering System    GM Part No  1052884   1 pint   of the proper viscosity  To 1050017   1 quart  or equivalent      Selene thie eevee Automatic DEXRON   III Automatic  tor JOu vehicle A aeuamaes Transaxle Transmission Fluid   Engine Oil    in the Index     Engine Coolant   50 50 mixture of clean  drinkable  water and use only GM  Goodwrench  DEX COOL   or  Havoline   DEX COOL      Coolant  See    Engine Coolant     in the Index     7 21    USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT    Key Multi Purpose Lubricant  Hood Latch Lubriplate   Lubricant Aerosol  Lock Cylinders   Superlube    GM Part Assembly   GM Part No  12346293 or  No  12346241 or equivalent   Secondary Latch    equivalent  or lubricant meeting    Supercharger Supercharger Oil  GM Part es a requirements of NLGI   2   No  12345982   See    Supercharger Category LB or GC LB   
123. d     What can you do about highway hypnosis  First  be  aware that it can happen     Then here are some tips       Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated  with a  comfortably cool interior       Keep your eyes moving  Scan the road ahead and to  the sides  Check your rearview mirrors and your  instruments frequently        If you get sleepy  pull off the road into a rest  service  or parking area and take a nap  get some exercise  or  both  For safety  treat drowsiness on the highway as  an emergency     4 27    Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country  or if you   re  planning to visit there  here are some tips that can make  your trips safer and more enjoyable        Keep your vehicle in good shape  Check all fluid  levels and also the brakes  tires  cooling system  and transaxle  These parts can work hard on  mountain roads        Know how to go down hills  The most important  thing to know is this  let your engine do some of the  slowing down  Shift to a lower gear when you go  down a steep or long hill     If you don   t shift down  your brakes could get  so hot that they wouldn   t work well  You would       then have poor braking or even none going  Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from down a hill  You could crash  Shift down to let    driving in flat or rolling terrain  your engine assist your brakes on a steep    downhill slope        4 28    Winter Driving    Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL  N  or with the  ignition off is da
124. d   Multifunction Alarm Locks and   Lighting Choices   Trunk   Theft   Content Theft Deterrent System  If Equipped   PASS Key   III   New Vehicle    Break In      Ignition Positions   Starting Your Engine   Engine Coolant Heater  Option    Automatic Transaxle Operation   Parking Brake   Shifting Into PARK  P    Shifting Out of PARK  P    Parking Over Things That Burn    2 47  2 48  2 49  2 49  2 55  2 57  2 60  2 64  2 68  2 69  2 69  2 73  2 74    2 78  2 91  2 93  2 96    Engine Exhaust   Running Your Engine While You   re Parked  Tilt Wheel   Turn Signal Multifunction Lever   Exterior Lamps   Interior Lamps   Mirrors   Storage Compartments   Accessory Power Outlet   Auxiliary Power Connection  Power Drop   OnStar    System  If Equipped    Power Sunroof  Option    The Instrument Panel    Your   Information System   Warning Lights  Gages and Indicators  Driver Information Center  DIC    Trip Computer  If Equipped    Head Up Display  HUD   Option     Windows    Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows  closed is dangerous  A child can be overcome by    the extreme heat and can suffer permanent  injuries or even death from heat stroke  Never  leave a child alone in a vehicle  especially with the  windows closed in warm or hot weather        Power Windows       Two Door Version Shown    Use the switches on the driver   s door armrest to operate  each of the windows when the ignition is on or when  Retained Accessory Power  RAP  is active  See     Retained Accessory Power 
125. d at a dealer   s facility     That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if  you have a concern     STEP THREE    Both General Motors and your  dealer are committed to making sure you are  completely satisfied with your new vehicle  However   if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the  procedure outlined in Steps One and Two  you should  file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce  any additional rights you may have  Canadian owners  refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance  Information booklet for information on the Canadian  Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan  CAMVAP      8 4    The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program  administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus  to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or  the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty   Although you may be required to resort to this informal  dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action   use of the program is free of charge and your case   will generally be heard within 40 days  If you do not  agree with the decision given in your case  you may  reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief  available to you     You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone  number or write them at the following address     BBB Auto Line   Council of Better Business Bureaus  Inc   4200 Wilson Boulevard   Suite 800   Arlington  VA 22203 1804    Telephone  1 800 955 5100    This program is available in all 50 states and t
126. d cleaning products  from your dealer  See    Appearance Care and Materials     in the Index     Here are some cleaning tips     Always read the instructions on the cleaner label   Clean up stains as soon as you can    before they set   Carefully scrape off any excess stain     Use a clean cloth or sponge  and change to a  clean area often  A soft brush may be used if stains  are stubborn     If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning  clean the  entire area immediately or it will set     Using Cleaner on Fabric    l   2     Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt     Always clean a whole trim panel or section  Mask  surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines     3  Follow the directions on the container label     Apply cleaner with a clean sponge  Don   t saturate  the material and don   t rub it roughly     As soon as you ve cleaned the section  use a sponge  to remove any excess cleaner     Wipe cleaned area with a clean  water dampened  towel or cloth     Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry     6 59    Special Fabric Cleaning Problems    Stains caused by such things as catsup  coffee  black    egg  fruit  fruit juice  milk  soft drinks  vomit  urine and  blood can be removed as follows     1  Carefully scrape off excess stain  then sponge the  soiled area with cool water     2  Ifa stain remains  follow the cleaner instructions  described earlier     3  If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine   treat the area with a water baking soda solution   1 t
127. down arrow to go to the next  or previous station and stay there   Setting Preset Stations    The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to  your favorite stations  You can set up to 18 stations   six AM  six FM1 and six FM2  by performing the  following steps     1  Turn the radio on   2  Press AM FM to select the band     3  Tune in the desired station     4  Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons  until SET appears on the display  Whenever you  press that numbered pushbutton  the station you set  will return     5  Repeat the steps for each pushbutton     Setting the Tone  Bass Treble     BASS  Slide the lever to the right or left to increase  or decrease bass     TREBLE  Slide the lever to the right or left to increase  or decrease treble  If a station is weak or noisy  you may  want to decrease the treble     Adjusting the Speakers  Balance Fade     BAL  Balance   Press this knob lightly so it extends   Turn this knob to move the sound to the left or right  speakers  The middle position balances the sound  between the speakers     FADE  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn  this knob to move the sound to the front or rear  speakers  The middle position balances the sound  between the speakers     Press these knobs back into their stored positions when  you   re not using them     Playing a Cassette Tape    Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that  are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side  Tapes  longer than that are so thin they may 
128. ds   The oil life percentage should change to 100     What to Do with Used Oil    Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be  unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer   Don   t let used oil stay on your skin for very long  Clean  your skin and nails with soap and water  or a good hand  cleaner  Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags  containing used engine oil  See the manufacturer   s  warnings about the use and disposal of oil products     Used oil can be a threat to the environment  If you  change your own oil  be sure to drain all the oil from  the filter before disposal  Never dispose of oil by  putting it in the trash  pouring it on the ground  into  sewers  or into streams or bodies of water  Instead   recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil  If  you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil   ask your dealer  a service station or a local recycling  center for help     6 19    Engine Air Cleaner Filter 1  Loosen the two clips located on the top of the engine  air cleaner filter housing and lift the filter cover tabs    The engine air cleaner filter is located in the front of the out of the housing    engine compartment on the driver   s side  See    Engine i      Compartment Overview    in the Index for more   Push the filter cover housing toward the engine   information on location  3  Pull out the old filter    To check or replace the engine air cleaner filter do 4  Check or install a new engine air cleaner filte
129. e 3  Last Door Closed Locking Only     If the power  door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter  if  equipped  is used to lock the vehicle while any door is  open and the key is out of the ignition  you will hear  three chimes  The doors will not lock  Five seconds after  the last door is closed  all doors will lock     Mode 4  Both Features On     This combines  Modes 2 and 3     Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory  it was  programmed to Mode 4  The mode to which your  vehicle was programmed may have changed since it left  the factory  To determine the mode to which your  vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a  different mode  do the following     1  Follow the instructions for    Entering Programming  Mode    listed previously     2  Press UNLOCK on the driver   s door armrest or the  unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter     3  Count the number of chimes you hear  The number  of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set  for  If you do not wish to change the current mode   you can either exit the programming mode by  following the instructions earlier in this section or  program the next feature available on your vehicle     4  Press UNLOCK again to change the current mode     5  Repeat Step 4 until you hear the number of chimes  that matches the mode you want     The mode you selected is now set  You can either exit  the programming mode by following the instructions  earlier in this section or program the next f
130. e Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote                                      7 11    Scheduled Maintenance    60 000 Miles  100 000 km     For supercharged engines only  Check the supercharger oil level and add the  proper supercharger oil as needed  or every 36 months  whichever occurs  first   See    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    in this section    An Emission Control Service   See footnote       Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote       Inspect engine accessory drive belt    An Emission Control Service                                         Replace engine air cleaner filter   An Emission Control Service     67 500 Miles  112 500 km     Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote                    75 000 Miles  125 000 km     Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions   Replace filter if necessary    An Emission Control Service   See footnote       Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote        7 12                      DATE       ACTUAL  MILEAGE SERVICED BY     DATE  ACTUAL  MILEAGE SERVICED BY     DATE       ACTUAL  MILEAGE SERVICED BY        Scheduled Maintenance    82 500 Mi
131. e a seat folded down unless you  need to        Towing a Trailer    If you don   t use the correct equipment and drive  properly  you can lose control when you pull a  trailer  For example  if the trailer is too heavy   the brakes may not work well    or even at all     You and your passengers could be seriously  injured  You may also damage your vehicle  the  resulting repairs would not be covered by your  warranty  Pull a trailer only if you have followed  all the steps in this section  Ask your dealer for  advice and information about towing a trailer  with your vehicle        Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the  proper trailer towing equipment  To identify what the  vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle  you  should read the information in    Weight of the Trailer     that appears later in this section  But trailering is  different than just driving your vehicle by itself   Trailering means changes in handling  durability and  fuel economy  Successful  safe trailering takes correct  equipment  and it has to be used properly     4 37    That   s the reason for this part  In it are many  time tested  important trailering tips and safety rules   Many of these are important for your safety and that   of your passengers  So please read this section carefully  before you pull a trailer     Load pulling components such as the engine  transaxle   wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder  against the drag of the added weight  The engine 
132. e air cleaner filter  a S E  An Emission Control Service                             For supercharged engines only  Check the supercharger oil level and add the  proper supercharger oil as needed  or every 36 months  whichever occurs  first   See    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    in this section    An Emission Control Service   See footnote        37 500 Miles  62 500 km   Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote      45 000 Miles  75 000 km   Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions   Replace filter if necessary     An Emission Control Service   See footnote                                            Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote           7 10    Scheduled Maintenance    50 000 Miles  83 000 km   hange automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven ACTUAL   Senge or more of these conditions  g       In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches ooo Re  90  F  32  C  or higher        In hilly or mountainous terrain        When doing frequent trailer towing        Uses such as found in taxi  police or delivery service     If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions  change the fluid  and filter at 100 000 miles  166 000 km      52 500 Miles  87 500 km   Rotate tires  See    Tir
133. e doors will unlock  If you would like all  the doors to unlock the first time you press UNLOCK   see    Locks and Lighting Choices    in the Index  If your  vehicle is equipped with the content theft deterrent  system  the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless  entry transmitter will disarm the system  See    Content  Theft Deterrent    in the Index for more details     Remote Trunk Release        Open Trunk   Press the button with the trunk  symbol on your remote keyless entry transmitter to open  your trunk  The transaxle must be in PARK  P  for this  feature to operate     Remote Panic Alarm  If Equipped     oe  oe  Panic Alarm   When you press the panic alarm  button with the horn symbol on the four button remote  keyless entry transmitter  the headlamps will flash and  the horn will sound  This will allow you to attract  attention if needed     2 11    Remote Lock Unlock Confirmation  If Equipped      Remote Lock Unlock Confirmation   Press this button  to use this feature  if equipped  this feature provides  feedback to the holder of the remote keyless entry  transmitter that a command has been received by the  keyless entry receiver  To signal that a command has  been received  the headlamps will flash and the horn  may sound briefly  To program the various modes  available  see    Locks and Lighting Choices    in   the Index     Matching Transmitter s  to Your Vehicle    Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to    prevent another transmitter from unlocking you
134. e easily confused  If you use  the wrong fasteners  parts can later break  or fall off  You could be hurt     Adding Equipment to the Outside of  Your Vehicle    Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can  affect the airflow around it  This may cause wind noise  and affect windshield washer performance  Check with  your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of  your vehicle        Fuel    The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number   VIN  shows the code letter or number that identifies  your engine  You will find the VIN at the top left of the  instrument panel  See    Vehicle Identification Number     in the Index     Gasoline Octane    If your vehicle has the 3100 V6 engine  VIN Code J    or 3800 V6 engine  VIN Code K   use regular unleaded  gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher  If the  octane is less than 87  you may get a heavy knocking  noise when you drive  If it is bad enough  it can damage  your engine  A little pinging noise when you accelerate  or drive uphill is considered normal  This does not  indicate a problem exists or that a higher octane fuel   is necessary     If your vehicle has the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine   VIN Code1   use only premium unleaded gasoline with  a posted octane of 91 or higher  In an emergency  you  may be able to use a lower octane    as low as 87    if  heavy knocking does not occur  Refill your tank with  premium fuel as soon as possible  If you are using   91 octane or higher octane fuel and you 
135. e in  good condition        Part C  Periodic Maintenance Inspections     explains important inspections that your dealer   s  service department or another qualified service  center should perform        Part D  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants     lists some recommended products necessary to help  keep your vehicle properly maintained  These products   or their equivalents  should be used whether you do the  work yourself or have it done        Part E  Maintenance Record    is a place for you   to record and keep track of the maintenance performed  on your vehicle  Keep your maintenance receipts   They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for  warranty repairs     Part A  Scheduled  Maintenance Services    Using Your Maintenance Schedule    We at General Motors want to help you keep your  vehicle in good working condition  But we don   t know  exactly how you ll drive it  You may drive very short  distances only a few times a week  Or you may drive  long distances all the time in very hot  dusty weather   You may use your vehicle in making deliveries    Or you may drive it to work  to do errands or in   many other ways     Because of all the different ways people use their  vehicles  maintenance needs vary  You may need more  frequent checks and replacements  So please read the  following and note how you drive  If you have any  questions on how to keep your vehicle in good  condition  see your dealer     This part tells you the maintenance services you should  have done a
136. e limitations can be found on the Subscriber  Services Agreement     In order to provide you with excellent service  calls with  the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded     OnStar Service is       available in the 48 contiguous United States  Alaska   Hawaii and Canada       available when the vehicle is within the operating  range of a cellular provider       subject to limitations caused by atmospheric  conditions  such as severe weather or topographical  conditions  such as mountainous terrain       subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations     2 72    Global positioning locating capabilities will not be  available if satellite signals are obstructed     OnStar will not function if the vehicle   s battery is  discharged or disconnected  It may also be inoperative if  the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle  electrical system components are damaged     OnStar is the communications link between you and  existing governmental emergency and roadside service  providers  OnStar will receive your call and use  reasonable effort to contact an appropriate provider   OnStar cannot promise that the providers will respond in  a timely manner or at all     Purse or Litter Bag Holder    On the front of the center console  to the right of the  accessory power outlet  there is a hook that can be used  to hold a purse or litter bag     Power Sunroof  Option        Base Version Shown    The sunroof includes a sliding glass panel and a  one piece sunshade  The 
137. e pedal  move the shift  lever through each gear range  pausing for about  three seconds in each range  Then  position the shift  lever in PARK  P         Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes     6 24    Then  without shutting off the engine  follow these steps        3100 V6 Engine 3800 V6 or 3800 V6  Supercharged Engine    The transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the red loop  located near the rear of the engine  See    Engine  Compartment Overview    in the Index for more  information on location     1  Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or  paper towel     2  Push it back in all the way  wait three seconds and  then pull it back out again        3100 V6 Engine 3800 V6 or 3800 V6 Supercharged Engine    3  Check both sides of the dipstick  and read the  lower level  The fluid level must be in the  cross hatched area     4  If the fluid level is in the acceptable range  push the  dipstick back in all the way     6 25    How to Add Fluid    Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what  kind of transaxle fluid to use  See    Recommended  Fluids and Lubricants    in the Index     If the fluid level is low  add only enough of the proper  fluid to bring the level into the cross hatched area on  the dipstick     1  Pull out the dipstick     2  Using a long neck funnel  add enough fluid at the  dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level     It doesn   t take much fluid  generally less than  one pint  0 5 L   Don   t overfill     6 26    NOTIC
138. e player needs to be  cleaned  It will still play tapes  but you should clean it as  soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and  player  If you notice a reduction in sound quality  try a  known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape  player at fault  If this other cassette has no improvement  in sound quality  clean the tape player     The recommended cleaning method for your cassette  tape player is the use of a scrubbing action   non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub  the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn   The recommended cleaning cassette is available through  your dealer  GM Part No  12344789      3 20    When cleaning the cassette tape player with the  recommended non abrasive cleaning cassette  it is  possible that the cassette may eject because the cut tape  detection feature on your radio may recognize it as a  broken tape  To prevent the cleaning cassette from being  ejected  use the following steps     1  Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY   2  Turn the radio off     3  Press and hold the TAPE PLAY button for five  seconds  The tape symbol on the display will flash  for two seconds     4  Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette     5  Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer   s  recommended cleaning time     When the cleaning cassette has been ejected  the cut tape  detection feature is active again     You may also choose a non scrubbing action  wet type  cleaner which uses a cassette with a
139. e the supercharged engine  remove the nut  in the center of the cover shield     C  Lift the engine cover shield at the front  slide the  catch tab out of the engine bracket and remove the  cover shield     D  Put the oil fill tube  with cap attached  in the valve  cover oil fill hole until you   re ready to replace the  cover shield     _   A       5 21    3800 V6 engine  There  is one bleed valve    It is located on the  thermostat housing        Thermostat Housing   3800 V6     5 22         Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL    coolant mixture  up to the base of the filler neck  See     Engine Coolant    in the Index for more information  about the proper coolant mixture     If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air  bleed valve  close the valve  Otherwise  close the  valves after the radiator is filled     6  Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine  and the compartment     7  If you have the 3800 V6 engine  replace the  3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield     A  Remove the oil fill tube  with cap attached  from  the valve cover     B  Insert the catch tab on the cover shield under the  bracket on the engine     C  Place the hole in the cover shield over the hole in  the valve cover  Install oil fill tube and cap by  twisting clockwise        D  If you have the supercharged engine  install the  nut in the center of the cover shield     8  Then fill the coolant recovery tank to COLD mark     9  Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank  but  
140. e up against  or very close to  any  air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured  or killed  Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer    outstanding protection for adults and older  children  but not for young children and infants   Neither the vehicle   s safety belt system nor its air  bag system is designed for them  Young children  and infants need the protection that a child  restraint system can provide        Q   A     What are the different types of add on child  restraints     Add on child restraints  which are purchased   by the vehicle   s owner  are available in four basic  types  Selection of a particular restraint should  take into consideration not only the child   s weight   height and age but also whether or not the restraint  will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which  it will be used     For most basic types of child restraints  there are  many different models available  When purchasing  a child restraint  be sure it is designed to be used  in a motor vehicle  If it is  the restraint will have a  label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle  safety standards     The restraint manufacturer   s instructions that  come with the restraint state the weight and  height limitations for a particular child restraint   In addition  there are many kinds of restraints  available for children with special needs     1 37    Newborn infants need complete support   including support for the head and neck   This is necessary because a newborn infant   s  ne
141. e vehicle  serviced as soon as possible     Malfunction Indicator Lamp  Service  Engine Soon Light in the United States  or Check Engine Light in Canada     SERVICE    ENGINE SOON       United States Canada    Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which  monitors operation of the fuel  ignition and emission  control systems     This system is called OBD II  On Board Diagnostics   Second Generation  and is intended to assure that  emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the  vehicle  helping to produce a cleaner environment  The  SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light  comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is  required  Malfunctions often will be indicated by the  system before any problem is apparent  This may prevent  more serious damage to your vehicle  This system is also  designed to assist your service technician in correctly  diagnosing any malfunction     NOTICE     If you keep driving your vehicle with this light  on  after a while  your emission controls may not  work as well  your fuel economy may not be as  good and your engine may not run as smoothly   This could lead to costly repairs that may not be  covered by your warranty     NOTICE     Modifications made to the engine  transaxle   exhaust  intake or fuel system of your vehicle or  the replacement of the original tires with other  than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria   TPC  can affect your vehicle   s emission controls  and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or  
142. e won   t move  even when you   re on fairly  level ground  always set your parking brake and  move the shift lever to PARK  P         Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won   t  move  See    Shifting Into PARK  P     in the Index     If you are parking on a hill and if you    re pulling a  trailer  also see    Towing a Trailer    in the Index   Horn    Press at or near the horn symbols located on the steering  wheel pad to sound the horn     Tilt Wheel    A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering  wheel before you drive  You can raise it to the highest  level to give your legs more room when you exit and  enter the vehicle  or you can lower it so that you   re more  comfortable while driving     The lever to adjust it is located on the left side of the  steering column  below the turn signal multifunction lever     To tilt the wheel  hold the  steering wheel and pull the  lever  Move the steering  wheel to a comfortable  level  then release the lever  to lock the wheel in place        Turn Signal Multifunction Lever       The lever on the left side of the steering column  includes the following        Turn and Lane Change Signals  Headlamp High Low Beam Changer  Flash to Pass Feature   Windshield Wipers   Windshield Washer     Cruise Control    For information on the exterior lamps  see    Exterior  Lamps    later in this section     2 49    Turn and Lane Change Signals    The turn signal has two upward  for right  and two  downward  for left  posi
143. easpoon  5 ml  of baking soda to 1 cup  250 ml   of lukewarm water     4  Let dry     Stains caused by candy  ice cream  mayonnaise  chili  sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows     1  Carefully scrape off excess stain     2  First  clean with cool water and allow to  dry completely     3  Ifa stain remains  follow the cleaner instructions  described earlier     6 60    Cleaning Vinyl  Use warm water and a clean cloth       Rub with a clean  damp cloth to remove dirt  You  may have to do it more than once        Things like tar  asphalt and shoe polish will stain  if you don   t get them off quickly  Use a clean  cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner  See your dealer  for this product     Cleaning Leather    Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or  saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth  Then  let the  leather dry naturally  Do not use heat to dry       For stubborn stains  use a leather cleaner  See your  dealer for this product       Never use oils  varnishes  solvent based or abrasive  cleaners  furniture polish or shoe polish on leather       Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned  immediately  If dirt is allowed to work into the  finish  it can harm the leather     Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel    Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces  of the instrument panel  Sprays containing silicones or  waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield  and even make it difficult to see through the windshield  under 
144. eature  available on your vehicle     Remote Driver   s Unlock Control    If Equipped    With the remote driver   s unlock control feature  you can  program your vehicle to do the following       When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless  entry transmitter  the driver   s door will unlock  and      when you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless  entry transmitter again within five seconds  all doors  will unlock     Programmable Modes    Mode 1  Remote All Doors Unlock     When you press  UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter once   all doors will unlock     Mode 2  Remote Driver   s Door and All Doors   Unlock     When you press UNLOCK on the remote  keyless entry transmitter once  the driver   s door will  unlock  If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds   all doors will unlock     Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory  it was  programmed to Mode 2  The mode to which your  vehicle was programmed may have been changed since  it left the factory  To determine the mode to which your  vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a  different mode  do the following     1  Follow the instructions for    Entering Programming  Mode    listed previously     2  Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless  entry transmitter     3  Count the number of chimes you hear  The number  of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for   If you do not wish to change the current mode  you  can either exit the programming mode by following  the instructions earlier i
145. ed previously     2  Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless  entry transmitter     3  Count the number of chimes you hear  The number  of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for   If you do not wish to change the current mode  you  can either exit the programming mode by following  the instructions earlier in this section or program the  next feature available on your vehicle     4  Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter  again to change the current mode     5  Repeat Step 4 until you hear the number of chimes  that matches the number of the mode you want     The mode you selected is now set  You can either exit  the programming mode by following the instructions  earlier in this section or program the next feature  available on your vehicle     Content Theft Deterrent System   If Equipped     Your vehicle may be equipped with a content  theft deterrent alarm system  Once armed  the system  will go off if someone tries to enter the vehicle without  using the remote keyless entry transmitter or the correct  key  or when someone turns the ignition on with an  incorrect key  The horn will sound  and your vehicle   s  headlamps will flash for about two minutes     Programmable Modes  Mode 1  Not Used    Mode 2  Content Theft On     If anyone tampers with the  trunk lock or opens a door while the content  theft deterrent system is armed  an alarm will sound and  the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes     Mode 3  Content Theft Off     The content
146. eed to be rebalanced     Wheel Replacement    Replace any wheel that is bent  cracked  or badly rusted  or corroded  If wheel nuts keep coming loose  the wheel   wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced  If the  wheel leaks air  replace it  except some aluminum  wheels  which can sometimes be repaired   See your  dealer if any of these conditions exist     Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need     6 55    Each new wheel should have the same load carrying  capacity  diameter  width  offset and be mounted the  same way as the one it replaces     If you need to replace any of your wheels  wheel bolts  or wheel nuts  replace them only with new GM original  equipment parts  This way  you will be sure to have the    right wheel  wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle     Using the wrong replacement wheels  wheel  bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be  dangerous  It could affect the braking and    handling of your vehicle  make your tires lose air  and make you lose control  You could have a  collision in which you or others could be injured   Always use the correct wheel  wheel bolts and  wheel nuts for replacement     6 56       NOTICE     The wrong wheel can also cause problems with  bearing life  brake cooling  speedometer or  odometer calibration  headlamp aim  bumper  height  vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire  chain clearance to the body and chassis        See    Changing a Flat Tire    in the Index for  more information     Used Replacement W
147. ehicle  called the Gross  Vehicle Weight Rating  GVWR   The GVWR includes    the weight of the vehicle  all occupants  fuel and cargo     Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross  Axle Weight Rating  GAWR  for either the front or  rear axle     If you do have a heavy load  spread it out  Don   t carry  more than 167 lbs   75 kg  in your trunk     4 36       Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the  GVWR  or either the maximum front or rear  GAWR  If you do  parts on your vehicle can  break  and it can change the way your vehicle  handles  These could cause you to lose control  and crash  Also  overloading can shorten the life  of your vehicle     NOTICE     Your warranty does not cover parts or  components that fail because of overloading     If you put things inside your vehicle    like suitcases   tools  packages or anything else    they will go as fast as  the vehicle goes  If you have to stop or turn quickly  or  if there is a crash  they   1l keep going     Things you put inside your vehicle can strike  and injure people in a sudden stop or turn  or  in a crash     Put things in the trunk of your vehicle  Ina  trunk  put them as far forward as you can   Try to spread the weight evenly    Never stack heavier things  like suitcases   inside the vehicle so that some of them are  above the tops of the seats    Don   t leave an unsecured child restraint in  your vehicle    When you carry something inside the  vehicle  secure it whenever you can    Don   t leav
148. ement Parts  Engine Air Cleaner Filter    All Engines GM Part No  24508572  A1614C   Engine Oil Filter   All Engines PF47    Automatic Transmission Filter 24206433    Spark Plugs   3100 V6  Code J  41 940    3800 V6  Code K  41 921    3800 V6 Supercharged  Code 1  NGK Type PTR4B  15   Spark Plug Gap  060 inch  1 52 mm   Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement   Type Shepherd   s Hook  Length 22 inches  56 cm      AC Delco   part number     6 76    y Section 7 Maintenance Schedule       This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle  Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety   dependability and emission control performance     7 2 Introduction 7 19 Part C  Periodic Maintenance Inspections  7 4 Part A  Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 21 Part D  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  7 5 Scheduled Maintenance 7 23 Part E  Maintenance Record   7 15 Part B  Owner Checks and Services    IMPORTANT   KEEP ENGINE OIL  AT THE PROPER  LEVEL AND CHANGE AS  RECOMMENDED    Protection  Plan       Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan  The Plan  supplements your new vehicle warranties  See your  Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer  for details     7 2    Introduction    Your Vehicle and the Environment    Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your  vehicle in good working condition  but also helps the  environment  All recommended maintenance procedures  are important  Improper vehicle maintenance can even  affect the quality of the air we
149. en  it  depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks  and  how quickly the person drinks them     But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of  0 10 percent  Research shows that the driving skills of  many people are impaired at a BAC approaching   0 05 percent  and that the effects are worse at night    All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above   0 05 percent  Statistics show that the chance of being in a  collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of  0 05 percent or above  A driver with a BAC level of   0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a  collision  At a BAC level of 0 10 percent  the chance of  this driver having a collision is 12 times greater  at a level  of 0 15 percent  the chance is 25 times greater     The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol  in one drink  No amount of coffee or number of cold  showers will speed that up     Ill be careful    isn   t the  right answer  What if there   s an emergency  a need to  take sudden action  as when a child darts into the street   A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able  to react quickly enough to avoid the collision     There   s something else about drinking and driving that  many people don   t know  Medical research shows that  alcohol in a person   s system can make crash injuries  worse  especially injuries to the brain  spinal cord or  heart  This means that when anyone who has been  drinking    driver or passenger    is in a crash  that  perso
150. en  people walking     It   s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in  good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled  with washer fluid  Replace your windshield wiper  inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing  areas on the windshield  or when strips of rubber start  to separate from the inserts     4 20 Aaa    Wet brakes can cause accidents  They won   t work  as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to  one side  You could lose control of the vehicle     After driving through a large puddle of water or    a car wash  apply your brake pedal lightly until  your brakes work normally              Driving too fast through large water puddles or even  going through some car washes can cause problems  too   The water may affect your brakes  Try to avoid puddles   But if you can   t  try to slow down before you hit them     4 21    Hydroplaning    Hydroplaning is dangerous  So much water can build up  under your tires that they can actually ride on the water   This can happen if the road is wet enough and you   re  going fast enough  When your vehicle is hydroplaning   it has little or no contact with the road     Hydroplaning doesn   t happen often  But it can if your  tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or  more is low  It can happen if a lot of water is standing on  the road  If you can see reflections from trees  telephone  poles or other vehicles  and raindrops    dimple    the  water   s surface  there could be hydroplaning
151. er   DIC  or the trip computer   if equipped      When you turn the system off  the Enhanced Traction  System warning light will come on and stay on  If the  Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin   when you press the button to turn the system off    the warning light will come on and the system will turn  off right away     You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing  the button again  The Enhanced Traction System  warning light should go off     4 12    Steering    Power Steering    If you lose power steering assist because the engine  stops or the system is not functioning  you can steer  but it will take much more effort     Variable Effort Steering  Option     This steering system provides less steering effort   for parking and when driving at speeds below 20 mph   32 km h   Steering effort will increase at higher speeds  for improved road feel     Steering Tips    Driving on Curves  It   s important to take curves at a reasonable speed     A lot of the    driver lost control    accidents mentioned  on the news happen on curves  Here   s why     Experienced driver or beginner  each of us is subject to  the same laws of physics when driving on curves  The  traction of the tires against the road surface makes it  possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn  the front wheels  If there   s no traction  inertia will keep  the vehicle going in the same direction  If you    ve ever  tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice  you   ll understand this
152. er   s instructions  If you can hear the  chains contacting your vehicle  stop and retighten  them  If the contact continues  slow down until it  stops  Driving too fast or spinning the wheels  with chains on will damage your vehicle        6 57    Appearance Care    Remember  cleaning products can be hazardous  Some  are toxic  Others can burst into flame if you strike a  match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle  Some are  dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space   When you use anything from a container to clean your  vehicle  be sure to follow the manufacturer   s warnings  and instructions  And always open your doors or  windows when you re cleaning the inside     Never use these to clean your vehicle   Gasoline   Benzene   Naphtha   Carbon Tetrachloride   Acetone   Paint Thinner   Turpentine    Lacquer Thinner    Nail Polish Remover    They can all be hazardous    some more than  others    and they can all damage your vehicle  too     6 58    Don   t use any of these unless this manual says you can   In many uses  these will damage your vehicle       Alcohol     Laundry Soap     Bleach     Reducing Agents    Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle    Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose  dirt  Wipe vinyl  leather  plastic and painted surfaces  with a clean  damp cloth     Cleaning of Fabric Carpet    Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and  carpet  They will clean normal spots and stains very  well  You can get GM approve
153. er  pull its free end as shown until  the belt is snug     Buckle  position and release it the same way as the lap  part of a lap shoulder belt  If the belt isn   t long enough   see    Safety Belt Extender    at the end of this section     Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned  so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly  if you ever had to     Children    Everyone in a vehicle needs protection  This includes  infants and all other children  Neither the distance  traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes  the need  for everyone  to use safety restraints  In fact   the law in every state in the United States and in every  Canadian province says children up to some age must  be restrained while in a vehicle     Infants and Young Children    Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles   they should have the protection provided by the  appropriate restraint  Young children should not use the  vehicle   s safety belts  unless there is no other choice     1 35    CAUTION   Continued     For example  in a crash at only 25 mph  40 km h    a 12 lb   5 5 kg  baby will suddenly become a  240 Ib   110 kg  force on a person   s arms  A baby  should be secured in an appropriate restraint     People should never hold a baby in their arms  while riding in a vehicle  A baby doesn   t weigh  much    until a crash  During a crash a baby will  become so heavy it is not possible to hold it   CAUTION   Continued        1 36    Children who ar
154. er weigh more than 1000 Ibs   454 kg    But even that can be too heavy     It depends on how you plan to use your rig  For  example  speed  altitude  road grades  outside  temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a  trailer are all important  And  it can also depend on any  special equipment that you have on your vehicle     You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or  advice  or you can write us at     Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance  P O  Box 33172  Detroit  MI 48232 5172    In Canada  write to     General Motors of Canada Limited  Customer Communication Centre  163 005  1908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario L1H 8P7    Weight of the Trailer Tongue    The tongue load  A  of any trailer is an important  weight to measure because it affects the total or gross  weight of your vehicle  The Gross Vehicle Weight   GVW  includes the curb weight of the vehicle  any  cargo you may carry in it  and the people who will be  riding in the vehicle  And if you tow a trailer  you must  add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle  will be carrying that weight  too  See    Loading Your  Vehicle    in the Index for more information about your  vehicle   s maximum load capacity        4 39    If you   re using a weight carrying hitch or a  weight distributing hitch  the trailer tongue  A   should weigh 10 15 percent of the total loaded  trailer weight  B      After you    ve loaded your trailer  weigh the trailer and  then the tongue  separately  to see if 
155. es on while you  are driving  there is a  problem with your  traction control system     TCS  OFF    See    Traction Control System Warning Light    in the  Index  When this warning light is on  the system will not  limit wheel spin  Adjust your driving accordingly     The traction control system automatically comes on  whenever you start your vehicle  To limit wheel spin   especially in slippery road conditions  you should  always leave the system on  But you can turn the  traction control system off if you ever need to  You  should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets  stuck in sand  mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is  required  See    Rocking Your Vehicle    in the Index     4 10    To turn the system off   press the button     The traction control system warning light will come on  and stay on  If the system is limiting wheel spin when  you press the button  the warning light will come on and  the system will turn off instantly     You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing  the button again  The traction control system warning  light should go off     Enhanced Traction System  ETS    3100 V6 or 3800 V6 Engine     Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System   ETS  that limits wheel spin  This is especially useful in  slippery road conditions  The system operates only if it  senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning  or beginning to lose traction  When this happens  the  system reduces engine power and may also upshift the  tr
156. essary     Exhaust System Inspection    Inspect the complete exhaust system  Inspect the body  near the exhaust system  Look for broken  damaged   missing or out of position parts as well as open seams   holes  loose connections or other conditions which could  cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let  exhaust fumes into the vehicle  See    Engine Exhaust      in the Index     7 19    Fuel System Inspection    Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks     Engine Cooling System Inspection    Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are  cracked  swollen or deteriorated  Inspect all pipes   fittings and clamps  replace as needed  Clean the outside  of the radiator and air conditioning condenser  To help  ensure proper operation  a pressure test of the cooling  system and pressure cap is recommended at least once   a year     7 20    Throttle System Inspection    Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding   and for damaged or missing parts  Replace parts as  needed  Replace any components that have high effort  or excessive wear  Do not lubricate accelerator and  cruise control cables     Brake System Inspection    Inspect the complete system  Inspect brake lines and  hoses for proper hook up  binding  leaks  cracks   chafing  etc  Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors  for surface condition  Inspect other brake parts   including calipers  parking brake  etc  Check parking  brake adjustment  You may need to have your brakes  inspe
157. et the parking brake   hold the regular brake   pedal down with the right  foot  Push down on the  parking brake pedal  with  the left foot     To release the parking brake  hold the regular brake  pedal down with the right foot and push the parking  brake pedal with the left foot  When you lift the left  foot  the parking brake pedal will follow it to the  released position     2 43    A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set  Shifting Into PARK  P   the ignition is on and the shift lever is not in PARK  P     or NEUTRAL  N      NOTICE     Driving with the parking brake on can cause the    It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if  the shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with the    rear brakes to overheat  You may have to replace parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll  If    them  and you could also damage other parts of  the vehicle     you have left the engine running  the vehicle can  move suddenly  You or others could be injured   To be sure your vehicle won   t move  even when  you   re on fairly level ground  use the steps that  follow  If you   re pulling a trailer  see    Towing a  Trailer    in the Index        If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill  see     Towing a Trailer    in the Index  That section shows  what to do first to keep the trailer from moving        1  Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and  set the parking brake     2 44    2  Move the shift lever into PARK  P  like this           Press in and
158. f after about 15 minutes     If you turn the rear window defogger on again  it will  operate for about seven and one half minutes before  turning off  The system will turn off when the ignition is  turned off     Do not attach anything like a temporary vehicle license  or decal across the rear window defogger grid     NOTICE     Don   t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on    the inside of the rear window  If you do  you  could cut or damage the warming grid  and the  repairs wouldn   t be covered by your warranty        Ventilation System       Change the direction of airflow by adjusting the  louvered vents     Your vehicle   s flow through ventilation system supplies  outside air into the vehicle when it is moving  Outside  air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning  compressor is running     Ventilation Tips      Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice  snow or  any other obstruction  such as leaves  The heater and  defroster will work far better  reducing the chance of  fogging the inside of your windows       When you enter a vehicle in cold weather  adjust the  mode knob to floor and the fan to the highest speed  for a few seconds before driving off  This helps clear  the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces  the chance of fogging the inside of your windows        Keep the air path under the front seats clear of  objects  This helps air to circulate throughout  your vehicle     Audio Systems    Your audio system has been designed to
159. fety belt comfort for  children who have outgrown child restraints and for  smaller adults  the comfort guides may be installed on  the shoulder belts     1 31    Here   s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt        2  Slide the guide under and past the belt  The elastic  cord must be under the belt  Then  place the guide   1  Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of over the belt  and insert the two edges of the belt into  the seatback and the interior body to remove the the slots of the guide   guide from its storage clip        3  Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat   The elastic cord must be under the belt and the  guide on top     4  Buckle  position and release the safety belt as  described in    Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions     earlier in this section  Make sure that the shoulder  belt crosses the shoulder     To remove and store the comfort guides  squeeze the belt  edges together so that you can take them out of the guides   Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip  and then  slide the guide onto the clip  Turn the guide and clip inward  and place them in between the seatback and the interior body   leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed     Center Passenger Position Lap Belt    y             When you sit in the center seating position  you have a  lap safety belt  which has no retractor  To make the belt  longer  tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt     1 34       To make the belt short
160. g Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface  When your  engine is cold  the coolant level should be at the COLD  mark or a little higher  When your engine is warm  the  level should be up to the HOT mark or a little higher     If this LOW COOLANT  light comes on and stays on     LOW it means you   re low on  COOLANT engine coolant        The coolant recovery tank is located in the engine  compartment toward the rear of the engine on the  passenger   s side of the vehicle  See    Engine  Compartment Overview    in the Index for more  information on location     6 29    Adding Coolant    If you need more coolant  add the proper DEX COOL    coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank  but be  careful not to spill it     If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty  add  coolant to the radiator  See    Engine Overheating    in  the Index     Turning the radiator pressure cap when the  engine and radiator are hot can allow steam    and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you  badly  With the coolant recovery tank  you will  almost never have to add coolant at the radiator   Never turn the radiator pressure cap    even a  little    when the engine and radiator are hot        6 30    You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot    engine parts  Coolant contains ethylene glycol   and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  enough  Don   t spill coolant on a hot engine        Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator   For information on how to add coolant to
161. g light comes on  there is a brake problem   Have your brake system inspected right away     OC     Canada    BRAKE    OC     United States    This light should come on when you turn the key to  RUN  If it doesn   t come on then  have it fixed so it will  be ready to warn you if there   s a problem     If the light comes on while you are driving  pull off the  road and stop carefully  You may notice that the pedal is  harder to push  Or  the pedal may go closer to the floor   It may take longer to stop  If the light is still on  have the  vehicle towed for service  See    Towing Your Vehicle    in  the Index     Your brake system may not be working properly  if the brake system warning light is on  Driving    with the brake system warning light on can lead  to an accident  If the light is still on after you   ve  pulled off the road and stopped carefully  have  the vehicle towed for service        When the ignition is on  the brake system warning light  will also come on when you set your parking brake  The  light will stay on if your parking brake doesn   t release  fully  If it stays on after your parking brake is fully  released  it means you have a brake problem     Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light    With the anti lock brake    system  the light will   come on when your engine   is started and may stay   on for three seconds    That   s normal   If the anti lock brake system warning light stays on  longer than normal after you   ve started your engine  turn  the igni
162. ger secured     If the code entered is incorrect  SEC will appear on the  display  The radio will remain secured until the correct  code is entered     When battery power is removed and later applied to a  secured radio  the radio won   t turn on and LOC will  appear on the display     To unlock a secured radio  see    Unlocking the  Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss    earlier  in this section     3 17    Audio Steering Wheel Controls   If Equipped     If your vehicle has this feature  you can control certain  radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel        PRESET  Press this button to hear the radio stations  that are set on your pushbuttons  The radio will go to a  preset station  play for a few seconds  then go to the next  station  Press this button again to stop scanning the  preset stations  When a cassette tape is playing  press  this button to change tape sides     3 18    AM FM  Press this button to select AM  FM1 or FM2   The band you select will be displayed  The frequency will  also be displayed and  if the station is in stereo  the stereo  indicator will also be displayed  If a cassette tape or  compact disc is playing  it will stop and the radio will play     A SEEK V  Press the up or down arrow to go to the  next or previous radio station and stay there     If a cassette tape is playing  press the up arrow to search  for the next selection on the tape  Press the down arrow  to search for the previous selection on the tape  Your  tape m
163. gh the disc     2 NEXT  Press this pushbutton or the SEEK up arrow to  go to the start of the next track  If you hold the  pushbutton or press it more than once  the player will  continue moving forward through the disc     3 RDM  Random   Press this pushbutton to hear the  tracks in random  rather than sequential  order  The  display will show RDM  Press RDM again to turn off  random play     5 REV  Reverse   Press and hold this pushbutton to  quickly reverse within a track  You will hear sound at a  reduced volume  The display will show elapsed time     6 FWD  Forward   Press and hold this pushbutton to  quickly advance within a track  You will hear sound at a  reduced volume  The display will show elapsed time     3 11    RECALL  Press this button to see what track   is currently playing  Press it again within five seconds  to see how long the track has been playing  When a  new track starts to play  the track number will also  appear  Press it a third time and the time of day   will be displayed     AM FM  Press this button to listen to the radio  when a CD is playing  The CD will stop but remain  in the player    CD PLAY  Press this button to play a CD when  listening to the radio        EJECT  Press this button to stop a CD when it is  playing or to remove a CD when it is not playing  The  EJECT button will work with the radio off     3 12    Compact Disc Messages    E  Error   If this message and a number appears on the  radio display or if the disc comes out  it could
164. gine Oil Fill Cap K  Engine Air Cleaner Filter  E  Engine Coolant Recovery Tank    Before closing the hood of your vehicle  be sure all the  filler caps are on properly  Then pull the hood down and  close it firmly     Engine Oil    If the LOW OIL LEVEL  light appears on the  instrument cluster  it means  you need to check your  engine oil level right away     LOW OIL  LEVEL    For more information  see    Low Oil Level Light    in  the Index     You should check your engine oil level regularly  this is  an added reminder     Checking Engine Oil    It   s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you  get fuel  In order to get an accurate reading  the oil must  be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground        3100 V6 Engine    3800 V6 or 3800 V6  Supercharged Engine    The engine oil dipstick handle is the yellow loop  located near the front of the engine  See    Engine  Compartment Overview    in the Index for more  information on location     6 13    Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to  drain back into the oil pan  If you don   t  the oil dipstick  might not show the actual level     Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or  cloth  then push it back in all the way  Remove it again   keeping the tip down  and check the level        3800 V6 Engine or 3800 V6 Supercharged Engine       3100 V6 Engine    6 14    When to Add Engine Oil    If the oil is at or below the ADD mark  then you    Il need  to add at least one quart of oil  
165. gram for Persons Canadian Government  with Disabilities 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors   8 6 Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program    Pontiac Cares    WPoNnTAc       With PONTIAC CARES  you are never more than  a phone call away from having your concern taken  care of     The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are  designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes  you as a valuable customer  appreciates your purchase  decision  and is dedicated to taking care of the most  important person     YOU  PONTIAC CARES is    A valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac    a feature that offers a multitude of benefits that can  give you safety  security  comfort and convenience     What Makes Up Pontiac Cares       A 3 year 36 000 mile  60 000 km   Bumper to Bumper Warranty       Customer Assistance     Roadside Assistance    Courtesy Transportation    All of these elements combine to make your driving  experience an enjoyable one and are discussed in greater  detail in your owner   s manual  Pontiac is focusing on  the changing needs of our customers and is committed  to giving you an exceptional level of customer care  throughout your ownership experience  Our goal is   to create total customer enthusiasm in our product and  our services and make you the most satisfied customer  in the world     Customer Satisfaction Procedure       Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your  dealer and to Pontiac  Normally  any concerns with the  sales transactio
166. half to the defroster and side  window vents     Kay  FRONT  Defroster   This setting directs most of  the air through the defroster  Some of the air goes to the  floor ducts and the side window vent  The air conditioning  compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the  outside temperature is below 38  F  3 3  C      Air Conditioning Compressor Button    Press the A C button to operate the air conditioning  compressor  The indicator light above the button will  glow when the button is pressed  You don   t have to    press the button to run the compressor in MAX  or defrost because it will already be running in  these modes     Air Conditioning    On very hot days  open the windows long enough to let  hot  inside air escape  This reduces the time it takes for  the vehicle to cool down     For quick cool down on very hot days  turn the fan on  and use MAX with the temperature levers all the way in  the blue area  If this setting is used for long periods of  time  the air in your vehicle may become too dry     For normal cooling on hot days  turn the fan on and use  vent with the temperature levers in the blue area and the  A C button pressed in  The system will bring in outside  air and cool it     On cool  but sunny days  the sun may warm your upper  body  but your lower body may not be warm enough  To  remedy this  you can use bi level with the temperature  levers in the middle and the A C button pushed in  The  system will bring in outside air and direct it to 
167. handle won   t open it  You increase the  chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in  a crash if the doors aren   t locked  So  wear  safety belts properly and lock the doors  whenever you drive     Young children who get into unlocked  vehicles may be unable to get out  A child  can be overcome by extreme heat and can  suffer permanent injuries or even death    from heat stroke  Always lock your vehicle To unlock or lock your doors from inside the vehicle   whenever you leave it  push the manual lever rearward or forward        Outsiders can easily enter through an  unlocked door when you slow down or stop  your vehicle  Locking your doors can help  prevent this from happening        Power Door Locks       To unlock all doors from inside the vehicle  press the  front of the power door lock switch on either front door   If your vehicle is equipped with a content theft deterrent  system and it is armed  the power door lock switch will  not unlock the doors until the system is disarmed  See     Content Theft Deterrent    in the Index for more  information on disarming the system     You can lock all doors from inside the vehicle by  pressing the rear of the power lock switch on either front  door  If your vehicle is equipped with the content  theft deterrent system  it may be programmed to arm the  system when the rear of the power lock switch is  pressed  See    Content Theft Deterrent System    in the  Index for more details     Last Door Closed Locking    The last door clo
168. he   District of Columbia  Eligibility is limited by vehicle age   mileage and other factors  General Motors reserves the  right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue  its participation in this program     Customer Assistance for Text  Telephone  TTY  Users    To assist customers who are deaf  hard of hearing  or  speech impaired and who use Text Telephones  TTYs    Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer  Assistance Center  Any TTY user can communicate with  Pontiac by dialing  1 800 833 PONT  7668      TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830      Customer Assistance Offices   Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll free number  for assistance  If a U S  customer wishes to write to Pontiac   the letter should be addressed to Pontiac   s Customer  Assistance Center     United States  Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center  P O  Box 33172  Detroit  MI 48232 5172    1 800 762 2737 or   1 800 833 7668  For Text Telephone devices  TTYs    Roadside Assistance  1 800 ROADSIDE  762 3743   From   Puerto Rico  1 800 496 9992  English   1 800 496 9993  Spanish     U S  Virgin Islands  1 800 496 9994  Fax Number  313 381 0022    Canada    General Motors of Canada Limited   Customer Communication Centre  163 005   1908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario L1H 8P7   1 800 263 3777  English    1 800 263 7854  French    1 800 263 3830  For Text Telephone devices  TTYs    Roadside Assistance  1 800 268 6800    All Overseas Locations    Please contact the l
169. he same correction you d use ina  skid  In any rear blowout  remove your foot from the  accelerator pedal  Get the vehicle under control by  steering the way you want the vehicle to go  It may be  very bumpy and noisy  but you can still steer  Gently  brake to a stop    well off the road if possible     If a tire goes flat  the next part shows how to use your  jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely     5 25    Changing a Flat Tire    If a tire goes flat  avoid further tire and wheel damage  by driving slowly to a level place  Turn on your hazard  warning flashers  sg i    Changing a tire can cause an injury  The vehicle  can slip off the jack and roll over you or other  people  You and they could be badly injured   Find a level place to change your tire  To help  prevent the vehicle from moving                       1  Set the parking brake firmly   2  Put the shift lever in PARK  P    3  Turn off the engine     The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and  change a tire     To be even more certain the vehicle won   t move   you can put blocks at the front and rear of the  tire farthest away from the one being changed   That would be the tire on the other side of the  vehicle  at the opposite end        5 26    Removing the Spare Tire and Tools  The equipment you ll need is in the trunk     Turn the center nut on  the compact spare tire  cover counterclockwise  to remove it        Remove the compact spare tire  See    Compact Spare  Tire    in the Index f
170. hear heavy  knocking  your engine needs service     Gasoline Specifications    It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications  which were developed by the American Automobile  Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the  Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers    Association for better  vehicle performance and engine protection  Gasolines  meeting these specifications could provide improved  driveability and emission control system performance  compared to other gasolines     In Canada  look for  the    Auto Makers     Choice    label on  the pump        Canada Only    California Fuel    If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission  Standards  see the underhood emission control label   it is  designed to operate on fuels that meet California  specifications  If this fuel is not available in states adopting  California emissions standards  your vehicle will operate  satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications  but  emission control system performance may be affected  The  malfunction indicator lamp may turn on  see    Malfunction  Indicator Lamp    in the Index  and your vehicle may fail a  smog check test  If this occurs  return to your authorized  GM dealer for diagnosis  If it is determined that the  condition is caused by the type of fuel used  repairs may  not be covered by your warranty     Additives    Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low  emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called  methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarb
171. heels    Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is    dangerous  You can   t know how it   s been used or  how far it   s been driven  It could fail suddenly  and cause a crash  If you have to replace a wheel   use a new GM original equipment wheel        Tire Chains    If your vehicle is an SE model with P225 60R16  size tires  don   t use tire chains  there   s not  enough clearance     Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper  amount of clearance can cause damage to the  brakes  suspension or other vehicle parts  The  area damaged by the tire chains could cause you  to lose control of your vehicle and you or others  may be injured in a crash    Use another type of traction device only if its  manufacturer recommends it for use on your  vehicle and tire size combination and road  conditions  Follow that manufacturer   s  instructions  To help avoid damage to your  vehicle  drive slowly  readjust or remove the  device if it   s contacting your vehicle  and don   t  spin your wheels    If you do find traction devices that will fit  install  them on the front tires        NOTICE     If your vehicle is a GT model  a GTP model or if  you have an SE model without P225 60R16 size  tires  use tire chains only where legal and only  when you must  Use only SAE Class    S    type  chains that are the proper size for your tires   Install them on the front tires and tighten them  as tightly as possible with the ends securely  fastened  Drive slowly and follow the chain  manufactur
172. hicle on your everyday routine    This method may take longer to calibrate      Compass Variance    Compass variance is the difference between earth   s  magnetic north and true geographic north  If not  adjusted to account for compass variance  your compass  could give false readings  The mirror is set to zone eight  upon leaving the factory  It will be necessary to adjust  the compass to compensate for compass variance if you  live outside zone eight  Under certain circumstances   such as during a long distance cross country trip  it will  be necessary to adjust for compass variance     2 61    To adjust for compass variance  do the following     1  Find your current location and variance zone number  on the map        2  Press and hold the COMP button for three seconds   If your vehicle has the optional mirror with the  compass  temperature display and OnStar system   press the on off button for six seconds  Release the  button when    ZONE    is displayed  The number  shown is the current zone number     2 62    3  Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the  compass temperature window on the mirror by  pressing the COMP button or the on off button  Once  you find your zone number  release the button  After  about four seconds  the mirror will return to the  compass and temperature display  and the new zone  number will be set     Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror  with Compass  Temperature Display  and  OnStar    Option     Your vehicle may have an automati
173. hicle s useful life  We  however   urge that all recommended maintenance services be  performed at the indicated intervals and the  maintenance be recorded       A good time to check your brakes is during tire  rotation  See    Brake System Inspection    under     Periodic Maintenance Inspections    in Part C  of this schedule     7 5    Scheduled Maintenance    Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance    Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the  GM Oil Life System     or every 12 months   whichever occurs first   Reset the system     Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know  when to change the engine oil and filter  This is based on  engine revolutions and engine temperature  and not on  mileage  Based on driving conditions  the mileage at  which an oil change will be indicated can vary  considerably  For the oil life system to work properly   you must reset the system every time the oil is changed     7 6    When the system has calculated that oil life has been  diminished  it will indicate that an oil change is  necessary  A CHANGE OIL SOON light will come on   Change your oil as soon as possible within the next   two times you stop for fuel  It is possible that  if you are  driving under the best conditions  the oil life system  may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over  a year  However  your engine oil and filter must be  changed at least once a year and at this time the system  must be reset  It is also important to check your oil  regularly
174. his position  To install your garage door opener   follow these instructions     1  Open the compartment by pressing the latch forward     Remove the hook and loop patch     2  Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop  patch and press it firmly to the back of your garage  door opener     3  Be sure that the button on your garage door opener is  centered above the area with raised lines on the  compartment door  Make sure the button is facing  down and press the opener firmly into place     4  Add one peg at a time until your garage door opener  operates with the compartment door closed while  pressing the button     Sunglasses Storage Compartment    The sunglasses storage compartment is the second  compartment from the rear on the overhead console    To open the sunglasses storage compartment  press the  release latch forward and pull the compartment down to  the full open position     Center Console Storage    To open the armrest storage area  pull up on the front  edge of the latch  The console has cassette and CD  storage and a coinholder     The center console also contains two cupholders  To  access the cupholders  pull the cupholder door  located  behind the console shift lever  The two cupholders will  pop up into an upright position     Below the center ashtray is an open storage  compartment  In front of this  you may have a  smaller compartment for storing smaller items     Rear Armrest Storage  If Equipped     If you have a trunk access panel  you will al
175. hts  and gages  They   re a big help     Your vehicle may also have a driver information center  that works along with the warning lights and gages   See    Driver Information Center  DIC     in the Index     Safety Belt Reminder Light    When the key is turned to RUN  a chime will come  on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten  their safety belts  unless the driver   s safety belt is  already buckled     The safety belt light will  also come on and stay  on for about 20 seconds   then it will flash for  about 55 seconds        If the driver   s belt is already buckled  neither the chime  nor the light will come on     Air Bag Readiness Light    There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument  panel  which shows the words SRS AIR BAG or the air  bag symbol  The system checks the air bag   s electrical  system for malfunctions  The light tells you if there is an  electrical problem  The system check includes the air  bag sensors  the air bag modules  the wiring and the  crash sensing and diagnostic module  For more  information on the air bag system  see    Air Bag    in   the Index      e  SRS AIR BAG re    United States Canada    This light will come on when you start your vehicle  and  it will flash for a few seconds  Then the light should go  out  This means the system is ready     If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the  vehicle or comes on when you are driving  your air bag  system may not work properly  Have your vehicle  serviced 
176. icle has one          Don   t let the other end    touch metal  Connect it  to the positive      terminal location on the  vehicle with the good  battery  Use a remote  positive     terminal if  the vehicle has one        8  Now connect the black  negative     cable to  the negative      terminal location on  the vehicle with the  good battery  Use a  remote negative      terminal if the vehicle  has one     Don   t let the other end touch anything until the next  step  The other end of the negative     cable doesn t go  to the dead battery  It goes to a heavy  unpainted metal  part or to a remote negative     terminal on the vehicle  with the dead battery     NOTICE     Damage to your vehicle may result from  electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed  incorrectly  To prevent electrical shorting  take  care that the cables don   t touch each other or any  other metal  The repairs wouldn   t be covered by  your warranty        9  Connect the other end of the negative     cable at  least 18 inches  45 cm  away from the dead battery   but not near engine parts that move  The electrical  connection is just as good there  and the chance of  sparks getting back to the battery is much less     10  Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  the engine for a while     11  Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery   If it won   t start after a few tries  it probably  needs service        Jumper Cable Removal    A  Heavy  Unpainted Metal Engine Part  B  Good Ba
177. icle suddenly slows or stops  Always leave  enough room up ahead to stop  even though you have  anti lock brakes     Using Anti Lock    Don   t pump the brakes  Just hold the brake pedal down  firmly and let anti lock work for you  You may feel a  slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise  but  this is normal     Braking in Emergencies    With anti lock  you can steer and brake at the same  time  In many emergencies  steering can help you more  than even the very best braking     Traction Control System   With 3800 Supercharged V6 Engine     Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits  wheel spin  This is especially useful in slippery road  conditions  The system operates only if it senses that  one or both of the front wheels are spinning or  beginning to lose traction  When this happens  the  system works the front brakes and reduces engine  power to limit wheel spin     This light will come on  when your traction control  system is limiting wheel  spin  See    Traction Control  Warning Light    in   the Index     LOW  TRAC    You may feel or hear the system working  but this  is normal     If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction  control system begins to limit wheel spin  the cruise  control will automatically disengage  When road  conditions allow you to safely use it again  you may  reengage the cruise control  See    Cruise Control     in the Index     This light should come  on briefly when you start  the engine  If it stays on  or com
178. igh beams are on  See     Head Up Display  HUD     in the Index for   more information     Flash to Pass Feature    This feature lets you use the high beam headlamps to  signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass    It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic or  off position     To use it  pull the turn signal lever toward you  then  release it     If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low  beam  the high beam headlamps will turn on and the  high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster  will come on  They will stay on as long as you hold the  lever toward you  Release the lever to return to the  initial position    If your vehicle is equipped with the Head Up Display   HUD   an arrow will appear in the display area to  indicate that the high beams are on     Windshield Wipers    To operate the windshield wipers  turn the band  marked WIPER located on the multifunction lever   upward or downward     MIST  Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle   Hold it there until the windshield wipers start  then let it  go  The windshield wipers will stop after one cycle  For  more cycles  hold the band on MIST longer     OFF  Turn the band to OFF to turn to windshield  wipers off     DELAY  Delayed Wiping   Turn the band upward to  choose one of the five delay settings  For longer periods  of time between wiper blade cycles  select a low setting   For shorter periods of time between wiper blade cycles   select a higher setting  The furthe
179. iles  166 000 km      See    Scheduled Maintenance Services    in the Index     How to Check Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle    fluid level if have been driving   Because this operation can be a little difficult  you ac ee ae    may choose to have this done at the dealership   When outside temperatures are above 90  F  32  C    service department     Athigh speed for quite a while    If you do it yourself  be sure to follow all the        In heavy traffic    especially in hot weather   instructions here  or you could get a false reading   on the dipstick    While pulling a trailer     To get the right reading  the fluid should be at      normal operating temperature  which is 180  F  NOTICE  to 200  F  82  C to 93  C      Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles   24 km  when outside temperatures are above 50  F   10  C   If it   s colder than 50  F  10  C   you may  have to drive longer     Too much or too little fluid can damage your  transaxle  Too much can mean that some of the    fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts  or exhaust system parts  starting a fire  Too little  fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat  Be  sure to get an accurate reading if you check your  transaxle fluid        6 23    Checking the Fluid Level  Prepare your vehicle as follows        Park your vehicle on a level place  Keep the  engine running      With the parking brake applied  place the shift lever  in PARK  P        With your foot on the brak
180. ine coolant will require change sooner    at  30 000 miles  50 000 km  or 24 months   whichever occurs first  Damage caused by the  use of coolant other than DEX COOL   is not  covered by your new vehicle warranty        6 27    What to Use    Use a mixture of one half clean  drinkable water and  one half DEX COOL   coolant which won   t damage  aluminum parts  If you use this coolant mixture  you   don   t need to add anything else     Adding only plain water to your cooling system  can be dangerous  Plain water  or some other  liquid such as alcohol  can boil before the proper  coolant mixture will  Your vehicle   s coolant    warning system is set for the proper coolant  mixture  With plain water or the wrong mixture   your engine could get too hot but you wouldn   t  get the overheat warning  Your engine could  catch fire and you or others could be burned   Use a 50 50 mixture of clean  drinkable water  and DEX COOL   coolant     6 28       NOTICE     If you use an improper coolant mixture  your  engine could overheat and be badly damaged   The repair cost wouldn   t be covered by your  warranty  Too much water in the mixture can  freeze and crack the engine  radiator  heater core  and other parts        If you have to add coolant more than four times a year   have your dealer check your cooling system     NOTICE     If you use the proper coolant  you don   t have to  add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to  improve the system  These can be harmful        Checkin
181. ing motion that may  free your vehicle  If that doesn   t get you out after a few  tries  you may need to be towed out  If you do need to  be towed out  see    Towing Your Vehicle    in the Index     y Section 6 Service and Appearance Care       Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle  This section begins with service and fuel information   and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels  There is also technical information about your  vehicle  and a part devoted to its appearance care     6 2 Service 6 58 Appearance Care   6 3 Fuel 6 58 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle   6 5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6 61 Care of Safety Belts   6 6 Filling Your Tank 6 62 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle  6 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 64 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated  6 8 Checking Things Under the Hood Wheels  If Equipped    6 13 Engine Oil 6 64 Cleaning Tires   6 20 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 64 Sheet Metal Damage   6 21 Supercharger Oil 6 65 Finish Damage   6 22 Automatic Transaxle Fluid 6 65 Underbody Maintenance   6 27 Engine Coolant 6 65 Chemical Paint Spotting   6 31 Radiator Pressure Cap 6 66 GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials  6 31 Power Steering Fluid 6 67 Vehicle Identification Number  VIN   6 33 Windshield Washer Fluid 6 67 Service Parts Identification Label   6 35 Brakes 6 68 Electrical System   6 39 Battery 6 74 Replacement Bulbs   6 40 Bulb Replacement 6 74 Capacities and Specifications   6 48 Windshield Wiper B
182. ing the parking brake     NOTICE     If you leave your radio on  it could be badly  damaged  The repairs wouldn   t be covered by  your warranty        3  Turn off the ignition on both vehicles  Unplug    unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette  lighter or in the accessary power outlets  Turn off the  radio and all lamps that aren   t needed  This will  avoid sparks and help save both batteries  And it  could save your radio     4  Open the hoods and locate the batteries  Find the  positive     and negative     terminal locations on  each vehicle  You will not need to access your  battery for jump starting  Your vehicle has a remote  positive     jump starting terminal for that purpose   The terminal is located in the engine compartment  on the passenger   s side of the vehicle  near the  diagonal cross brace  See    Engine Compartment  Overview    in the Index for more information  on location        To uncover the remote positive     terminal  squeeze  the sides of the plastic cap and slide the cap off  You  should always use the remote positive     terminal  instead of the positive     terminal on the battery     Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you   An electric fan can start up even when the engine Don   t get it on you  If you accidentally get it in  is not running and can injure you  Keep hands  your eyes or on your skin  flush the place with  clothing and tools away from any underhood water and get medical help immediately   electric fan     Fans o
183. ins on steady  see    If the Light  Is On Steady    following  If the light is still flashing   follow the previous steps  and drive the vehicle to your  dealer or qualified service center for service     If the Light Is On Steady    You may be able to correct the emission system  malfunction by considering the following     Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle     If so  reinstall the fuel cap  making sure to fully install  the cap  See    Filling Your Tank    in the Index  The  diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been  left off or improperly installed  A loose or missing fuel  cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere  A  few driving trips with the cap properly installed should  turn the light off     Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water     If so  your electrical system may be wet  The condition  will usually be corrected when the electrical system  dries out  A few driving trips should turn the light off     Are you low on fuel     As your engine starts to run out of fuel  your engine may  not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of  air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire  The  system can detect this  Adding fuel should correct this  condition  Make sure to install the fuel cap properly  See     Filling Your Tank    in the Index  It will take a few  driving trips to turn the light off     Have you recently changed brands of fuel     If so  be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel  See     Fuel
184. is        You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt   In a crash  you wouldn   t have the full width   of the belt to spread impact forces  If a belt is  twisted  make it straight so it can work properly   or ask your dealer to fix it          3          A  i    as     D SGIAN  i  J                 The belt is twisted across the body     1 19    Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy    Safety belts work for everyone  including pregnant  women  Like all occupants  they are more likely to  be seriously injured if they don   t wear safety belts        To unlatch the belt  just push the button on the buckle   The belt should go back out of the way     Before you close the door  be sure the belt is out of the  way  If you slam the door on it  you can damage both the  belt and your vehicle        A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt  and  the lap portion should be worn as low as possible  below  the rounding  throughout the pregnancy     1 20    The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  mother  When a safety belt is worn properly  it   s more  likely that the fetus won   t be hurt in a crash  For  pregnant women  as for anyone  the key to making  safety belts effective is wearing them properly     Right Front Passenger Position    To learn how to wear the right front passenger   s  safety belt properly  see    Driver Position    earlier  in this section     The right front passenger   s safety belt works the same  way as the driver   s safety belt    except f
185. is  required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under  greater loads  generating extra heat  What   s more  the  trailer adds considerably to wind resistance  increasing  the pulling requirements     If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer  If you do  here are some important points        There are many different laws  including speed limit  restrictions  having to do with trailering  Make sure  your rig will be legal  not only where you live but  also where you   ll be driving  A good source for this  information can be state or provincial police       Consider using a sway control  You can ask a hitch  dealer about sway controls     4 38      Don   t tow a trailer at all during the first 1 000 miles   1 600 km  your new vehicle is driven  Your engine   axle or other parts could be damaged        Then  during the first 500 miles  800 km  that you  tow a trailer  don   t drive over 50 mph  80 km h  and  don   t make starts at full throttle  This helps your  engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the  heavier loads       Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer   Don   t drive faster than the maximum posted speed  for trailers  or no more than 55 mph  90 km h   to  save wear on your vehicle   s parts     Three important considerations have to do with weight     the weight of the trailer      the weight of the trailer tongue      and the total weight on your vehicle   s tires     Weight of the Trailer  How heavy can a trailer safely be     It should nev
186. ition exists  an overheat  protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders  helps prevent engine damage  In this mode  you will notice  a significant loss in power and engine performance  The  low coolant light may come on and the temperature   gage will indicate an overheat condition exists  Driving  extended miles  km  and or towing a trailer in the   overheat protection mode should be avoided     NOTICE     After driving in the overheated engine protection  operating mode  to avoid engine damage  allow  the engine to cool before attempting any repair   The engine oil will be severely degraded  Repair  the cause of coolant loss  change the oil and reset  the oil life system  See    Engine Oil       in the Index        5 11    If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine       Steam from an overheated engine can burn you  badly  even if you just open the hood  Stay away  from the engine if you see or hear steam coming  from it  Just turn it off and get everyone away  from the vehicle until it cools down  Wait until  there is no sign of steam or coolant before you  open the hood     If you keep driving when your engine is  overheated  the liquids in it can catch fire  You or  others could be badly burned  Stop your engine if  it overheats  and get out of the vehicle until the  engine is cool  See          Overheated Engine  Protection Operating Mode    in the Index     5 12    NOTICE     If your engine catches fire because you keep    driving with no coolant  your vehicle 
187. key  your vehicle needs service   If your vehicle does start  the first key may be faulty   See your dealer who can service the PASS Key III to  have a new key made  In an emergency  contact Pontiac  Roadside Assistance  See    Roadside Assistance    in the  Index for more information     It is possible for the PASS Key III decoder to learn   the transponder value of a new or replacement key    Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for the  vehicle  This procedure is for learning additional keys  only  If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do  not operate  you must see your dealer or a locksmith  who can service PASS Key III to have keys made and  programmed to the system     See your dealer or a locksmith who can service  PASS Key III to get a new key blank that is cut exactly  as the ignition key that operates the system     Canadian Owners  If you lose or damage your keys   only a GM dealer can service PASS KEY III to have  new keys made  To program additional keys  you will  need two current driver   s keys   black in color   You  must add a step to the procedure     To program the  new key     After Step 2  repeat Steps 1 and 2 with   the second current driver   s key   black in color    Then continue with Step 3     To program the new key do the following   1  Verify that the new key has    PK3    stamped on it     2  Insert the master key in the ignition and start the  engine  If the engine will not start  see your dealer  for service     3  After the e
188. l Warning Symbol    Coolant Temperature Symbol    Charging System Symbol    When the ignition key is turned to RUN  the entire HUD  image will come on  Then the Head Up Display will  operate normally     NOTICE     Although the HUD image appears to be near   the front of the vehicle  do not use it as a parking  aid  The HUD was not designed for that purpose   If you try to use it that way  such as in a parking   lot  you may misjudge distance and run   into something        When the HUD is on  the speedometer reading will be  displayed continually  The current radio station or CD  track number will only be displayed for three seconds  after the radio or CD track status changes  This will  happen whenever one of the radio controls is pressed   either on the radio itself or on the optional steering  wheel controls     2 97    To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly do  the following        1  Adjust your seat  if necessary  to a  comfortable position     2  Start the engine and adjust the HUD controls located  on the instrument panel  to the right of the steering  wheel  Move the DIM thumbwheel up or down to  adjust brightness        3  Press the top of the UP DN switch until the HUD  image stops moving  Then press the bottom of the  switch until the image is as low as possible but in  full view     4  Move the DIM thumbwheel down until the HUD  image is no brighter than necessary  To turn the HUD  off  move the DIM thumbwheel all the way down     If the sun comes out  it 
189. l very close to the child   s face or neck  you  might want to place the child in the center seat  position  the one that has only a lap belt     1 52       Never do this     Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a  lap shoulder belt  but the shoulder part is behind    the child  If the child wears the belt in this way   in a crash the child might slide under the belt   The belt   s force would then be applied right on  the child   s abdomen  That could cause serious or  fatal injuries        Wherever the child sits  the lap portion of the belt  should be worn low and snug on the hips  just touching  the child   s thighs  This applies belt force to the child   s  pelvic bones in a crash     1 53    Safety Belt Extender    If the vehicle   s safety belt will fasten around you  you  should use it     But if a safety belt isn   t long enough to fasten  your  dealer will order you an extender  It   s free  When you go  in to order it  take the heaviest coat you will wear  so the  extender will be long enough for you  The extender will  be just for you  and just for the seat in your vehicle that  you choose  Don   t let someone else use it  and use it  only for the seat it is made to fit  To wear it  just attach it  to the regular safety belt     Checking Your Restraint Systems    Now and then  make sure the safety belt reminder light  and all your belts  buckles  latch plates  retractors and  anchorages are working properly  Look for any other  loose or damaged safety belt s
190. lade Replacement 6 75 Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity  6 49 Tires 6 76 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts    6 1    Service    Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to  be happy with it  We hope you   ll go to your dealer for  all your service needs  You    ll get genuine GM parts and  GM trained and supported service people     We hope you    ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM   Genuine GM parts have one of these marks     ACDelco      n    T NINE  adele       Doing Your Own Service Work    If you want to do some of your own service work  you    ll  want to use the proper service manual  It tells you much  more about how to service your vehicle than this manual  can  To order the proper service manual  see    Service  and Owner Publications    in the Index     Your vehicle has an air bag system  Before attempting to  do your own service work  see    Servicing Your Air  Bag Equipped Vehicle    in the Index     You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list  the mileage and the date of any service work you  perform  See    Maintenance Record    in the Index     You can be injured and your vehicle could be  damaged if you try to do service work ona  vehicle without knowing enough about it        Besure you have sufficient knowledge   experience  the proper replacement parts    and tools before you attempt any vehicle  maintenance task    Be sure to use the proper nuts  bolts and  other fasteners     English    and    metric     fasteners can b
191. leave the pressure cap off     5 23    10  Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the  upper radiator hose getting hot  Watch out for the  engine cooling fans     11        By this time  the coolant level inside the radiator  filler neck may be lower  If the level is lower  add  more of the proper DEX COOL   coolant mixture  through the filler neck until the level reaches the  base of the filler neck     12     13        Then replace the pressure cap  At any time during  this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the  filler neck  reinstall the pressure cap  Be sure the  arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this     Check the coolant in the recovery tank  The level in  the coolant recovery tank should be at the HOT  mark when the engine is hot or at the COLD mark  when the engine is cold     If a Tire Goes Flat    It   s unusual for a tire to    blow out    while you    re driving   especially if you maintain your tires properly  If air goes  out of a tire  it   s much more likely to leak out slowly   But if you should ever have a    blowout     here are a few  tips about what to expect and what to do     If a front tire fails  the flat tire will create a drag that  pulls the vehicle toward that side  Take your foot off the  accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly   Steer to maintain lane position  and then gently brake to  a stop well out of the traffic lane     A rear blowout  particularly on a curve  acts much like a  skid and may require t
192. les  137 500 km   Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote        90 000 Miles  150 000 km    Replace engine air cleaner filter   An Emission Control Service  MILEAGE    For supercharged engines only  Check the supercharger oil level and add the ooo i  proper supercharger oil as needed  or every 36 months  whichever occurs    first   See    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    in this section   An Emission Control Service   See footnote        Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote        97 500 Miles  162 500 km   Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and Rotation    in the Index for proper  rotation pattern and additional information   See footnote                                                                    7 13    Scheduled Maintenance  100 000 Miles  166 000 km     Inspect spark plug wires  ACTUAL   SERVICED BY     SERVICED BY    An Emission Control Service  MILEAGE   Replace spark plugs  Oooo o   An Emission Control Service     Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven   under one or more of these conditions        In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches  90  F  32  C  or higher        In hilly or mountainous terrain        When doing frequent trailer towing        Uses such as found in taxi  police or delivery 
193. lide the lever to the right or left to increase  or decrease treble  If a station is weak or noisy  you may  want to decrease the treble     Adjusting the Speakers  Balance Fade     BAL  Balance   Press this knob lightly so it extends   Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers  The  middle position balances the sound between the speakers     FADE  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn it to  move the sound to the front or rear speakers  The middle  position balances the sound between the speakers     Press these knobs back into their stored positions when  you   re not using them     Playing a Compact Disc    Insert a disc partway into the slot  label side up  The  player will pull it in  The compact disc symbol will  appear on the display  If the ignition and the radio are  on  the disc will begin playing  CD will appear on the  display next to the compact disc symbol  If you want to  insert a disc when the ignition is off  first press the  EJECT button     The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single  discs with an adapter ring  Full size compact discs and  the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner     If an error appears on the display  see    Compact Disc  Messages    later in this section     1 PREV  Previous   Press this pushbutton or the SEEK  down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more  than eight seconds have played  If you hold the  pushbutton or press it more than once  the player will  continue moving back throu
194. ls down  Also  see       Overheated  Engine Protection Operating Mode    listed previously in  this section     You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service  help right away     5 13    When you decide it   s safe to lift the hood  here   s what  you ll see        3800 V6 and 3800 V6 Supercharged Engines  A  Electric Engine Cooling Fans       B  Radiator Pressure Cap  C  Coolant Recovery Tank    3100 V6 Engine  A  Electric Engine Cooling Fans    B  Radiator Pressure Cap  C  Coolant Recovery Tank    An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can    start up even when the engine is not running and  can injure you  Keep hands  clothing and tools  away from any underhood electric fan        If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling   don   t do anything else until it cools down  The vehicle  should be parked on a level surface        When the engine is cold  the coolant level should be at  or above the COLD mark on the coolant recovery tank   If it isn   t  you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in  the radiator hoses  heater hoses  radiator  water pump or  somewhere else in the cooling system     5 15    Heater and radiator hoses  and other engine  parts  can be very hot  Don   t touch them  If you    do  you can be burned     Don   t run the engine if there is a leak  If you run  the engine  it could lose all coolant  That could  cause an engine fire  and you could be burned   Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle     If there seems t
195. ls instead of text  Symbols    used on your vehicle  are shown along with the text  describing the operation or information relating to a  specific component  control  message  gage or indicator     If you need help figuring out a specific name of a  component  gage or indicator reference the following  topics in the Index          Engine Compartment Overview           Instrument Panel           Comfort Controls            Audio Systems       Also see    Warning Lights and Gages    in the Index     These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle     CAUTION  POSSIBLE  INJURY    PROTECT  EYES BY  SHIELDING    CAUSTIC  BATTERY  ACID COULD  CAUSE  BURNS    AVOID  SPARKS OR  FLAMES    SPARK OR  FLAME  COULD  EXPLODE  BATTERY       LATCH BOTH LAP AND    SHOULDER BELTS TO  PROTECT OCCUPANT    4  DO NOT TWIST SAFETY   e    BELT WHEN ATTACHING    FASTEN  SEAT AIR BAG  BELTS    MOVE SEAT m DO NOT INSTALL  FULLY   A REAR FACING  REARWARD CHILD RESTRAINT  SECURE    IN THIS SEATING  CHILD SEAT POSITION    PULL BELT      out NAS DO NOT INSTALL A  COMPLETELY Ve FORWARD  FACING  y  CHILD RESTRAINT    THEN SECURE  CHILD SEAT IN THIS SEATING  POSITION    POWER   t DOOR LOCK    wiNnDOow  _     UNLOCK         w    ey        MASTER    s 1  LIGHTING      SWITCH          TURN  SIGNALS    PARKING  LAMPS    HAZARD  WARNING  FLASHER    DAYTIME  RUNNING  LAMPS    71      0    ENGINE  COOLANT  TEMP    BATTERY  CHARGING  SYSTEM    cme   COOLANT ia    ENGINE OIL  oe    ANTI LOCK  
196. mply by looking at them  Radial tires may look  properly inflated even when they   re underinflated     Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve  stems  They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt  and moisture     Tire Inspection and Rotation    Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles   10 000 to 13 000 km   Any time you notice unusual  wear  rotate your tires as soon as possible and check  wheel alignment  Also check for damaged tires or  wheels  See    When It   s Time for New Tires    and     Wheel Replacement    later in this section for   more information     The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more  uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle  The first  rotation is the most important  See    Scheduled  Maintenance Services    in the Index for scheduled  rotation intervals        When rotating your tires  always use the correct  rotation pattern shown here     Don   t include the compact spare tire in your   tire rotation    After the tires have been rotated  adjust the front and  rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire Loading  Information label  Make certain that all wheel nuts  are properly tightened  See    Wheel Nut Torque    in  the Index     Rust or dirt on a wheel  or on the parts to which  it is fastened  can make wheel nuts become loose  after a time  The wheel could come off and cause  an accident  When you change a wheel  remove    any rust or dirt from places where the wheel  attaches to the vehicle  In an emergency  you can
197. n   s chance of being killed or permanently disabled  is higher than if the person had not been drinking     Drinking and then driving is very dangerous   Your reflexes  perceptions  attentiveness and  judgment can be affected by even a small amount    of alcohol  You can have a serious    or even   fatal    collision if you drive after drinking   Please don   t drink and drive or ride with a driver  who has been drinking  Ride home in a cab  or if  you   re with a group  designate a driver who will  not drink        Control of a Vehicle    You have three systems that make your vehicle go where  you want it to go  They are the brakes  the steering and  the accelerator  All three systems have to do their work  at the places where the tires meet the road           Sometimes  as when you   re driving on snow or ice  it   s  easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires  and road can provide  That means you can lose control  of your vehicle  Also see    Traction Control System    and     Enhanced Traction System    in the Index     4 6    Braking    Braking action involves perception time and  reaction time     First  you have to decide to push on the brake pedal   That   s perception time  Then you have to bring up your  foot and do it  That   s reaction time     Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second  But  that   s only an average  It might be less with one driver  and as long as two or three seconds or more with  another  Age  physical condition  alertness  
198. n  and stays on for an extended period of time when the  system is turned on  your vehicle needs service     2 82    Enhanced Traction System Warning Light   3100 V6 or 3800 V6 Engine     The Enhanced Traction  System warning light    may come on for the  a a following reasons        If you turn the system off by pressing the TRAC  button on the far right side of the Driver Information  Center or trip computer  if equipped   the warning  light will come on and stay on  To turn the system  back on  press the button again  The warning light  should go off  See    Enhanced Traction System    in  the Index for more information        Ifthe Enhanced Traction System warning light  comes on and stays on for an extended period of  time when the system is turned on  your vehicle  needs service  Adjust your driving accordingly        If the traction control system is affected by an  engine related problem  the system will turn off and  the warning light will come on     When this warning light is on  the system will not limit  wheel spin  Adjust your driving accordingly     Low Traction Light    If you have the Enhanced  Traction System or the  Traction Control System   this light will also come  on when the system is  limiting wheel spin     LOW  TRAC    You may feel or hear the system working  but this is  normal  Slippery road conditions may exist if the low  traction light comes on  so adjust your driving  accordingly  The light will stay on for a few seconds  after the Enhanced Tr
199. n  unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag   Replace the cap and completely tighten it  Then remove  the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick     The level should be at the C  3100 V6 engine  or COLD   3800 V6 and 3800 V6 Supercharged engines  mark  If  necessary  add only enough fluid to bring the level up to  the mark     6 32       3100 V6 Engine       3800 V6 or 3800 V6 Supercharged Engine    When the engine compartment is hot  the level should be  at the H  3100 V6 engine  or HOT  3800 V6 and 3800  V6 Supercharged engines  mark  If the fluid is at the  ADD mark  you should add fluid     What to Use    To determine what kind of fluid to use  see     Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    in the Index   Always use the proper fluid  Failure to use the proper  fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals     Windshield Washer Fluid  What to Use    When you need windshield washer fluid  be sure to read  the manufacturer   s instructions before use  If you will be  operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature  may fall below freezing  use a fluid that has sufficient  protection against freezing  See    Engine Compartment  Overview    in the Index for reservoir location     6 33    Adding Washer Fluid    The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the    engine compartment on the passenger   s side of the      vehicle near the diagonal cross brace    When using concentrated washer fluid     follow the manufacturer   s instruc
200. n incoming or  outgoing call is in progress  Press the Communications  button if you notice the light blinking and you are not  on a call     The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system  malfunction  If this occurs press the OnStar Services    button to attempt to contact an advisor  If the connection  is made  the advisor will assist you with steps to take to  make sure that the system is functioning properly  If you    cannot contact the advisor  take your vehicle to your  dealership as soon as possible for assistance     2 70    OnStar Services    The following services are available within OnStar  service plans  Your vehicle comes with a specific  one year service plan that allows use of some or all  of the following services     Automatic Notification of Air Bag   Deployment  If an air bag deploys  a priority  emergency signal is automatically sent to the center   An advisor will locate your vehicle   s position  try to  contact you and assist you in the situation  If the  center is unable to contact you  an emergency service  provider will be contacted     Stolen Vehicle Tracking  Call the center at  1 888 4 ONSTAR  1 888 466 7827  to report your  vehicle stolen  The system can then attempt to locate  and track your vehicle and the advisor will assist the  proper authorities     Roadside Assistance with Location  For vehicle  breakdowns  press the OnStar Services button  An  advisor will contact the appropriate help     Remote Diagnostics  If an instrument pa
201. n or the operation of your vehicle will be  resolved by your dealer   s sales or service departments   Sometimes  however  despite the best intentions of   all concerned  misunderstandings can occur  If your  concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction    the following steps should be taken     STEP ONE    Discuss your concern with a member  of dealership management  Normally  concerns can  be quickly resolved at that level  If the matter has  already been reviewed with the sales  service or parts  manager  contact the owner of the dealership or the  general manager     STEP TWO    If after contacting a member of  dealership management  it appears your concern cannot  be resolved by the dealership without further help  contact  the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling  1 800 762 2737  In Canada  contact GM of Canada  Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling  1 800 263 3777  English  or 1 800 263 7854  French      We encourage you to call the toll free number in order  to give your inquiry prompt attention  Please have the  following information available to give the Customer   Assistance Representative       Vehicle Identification Number  This is available  from the vehicle registration or title  or the plate  at the top left of the instrument panel and visible  through the windshield        Dealership name and location    Vehicle delivery date and present mileage    When contacting Pontiac  please remember that    your concern will likely be resolve
202. n this section or program the  next feature available on your vehicle     4  Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry  transmitter again to change the current mode     5  Repeat Step 4 until you hear the number of chimes  that matches the mode you want     The mode you selected is now set  You can either exit  the programming mode by following the instructions  earlier in this section or program the next feature  available on your vehicle     2 19    Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation   If Equipped     With the remote lock and unlock confirmation feature   you can program your vehicle to do the following       When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to  unlock your vehicle  your headlamps will flash to let  you know the command has been received  If you  press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter  again within five seconds  the horn will sound briefly  and the headlamps will flash to let you know your  vehicle is locked       When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to  unlock your vehicle  your headlamps will flash to let  you know the command has been received     Programmable Modes    Mode 1  Both Features Off     Remote lock and unlock  confirmation are disabled     Mode 2  Exterior Lamps Flash Only      Remote Lock Confirmation  When you use the  remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the vehicle   the headlamps will flash to let you know the  command is received     2 20      Remote Unlock Confirmation  When you use the  remote keyless entr
203. nd when you should schedule them  If you  go to your dealer for your service needs  yow    ll know  that GM trained and supported service people will  perform the work using genuine GM parts     The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in  Part D  Make sure whoever services your vehicle  uses these  All parts should be replaced and all  necessary repairs done before you or anyone else  drives the vehicle     This schedule is for vehicles that        carry passengers and cargo within recommended  limits  You will find these limits on your vehicle   s  Tire Loading Information label  See    Loading  Your Vehicle    in the Index       are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal  driving limits        use the recommended fuel  See    Fuel    in the Index     Scheduled Maintenance    The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles   166 000 km  should be repeated after 100 000 miles   166 000 km  at the same intervals for the life of this  vehicle  The services shown at 150 000 miles    240 000 km  should be repeated at the same interval  after 150 000 miles  240 000 km  for the life of   this vehicle     See    Owner Checks and Services    and    Periodic  Maintenance Inspections    following     Footnotes       The U S  Environmental Protection Agency or the  California Air Resources Board has determined that the  failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify  the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to  the completion of the ve
204. ndex     Trip Computer  If Equipped     DAD cam    BAS DABAN osLi00KM    Som        SS AVG ECON   B RANGE        FUEL USED   OIL LIFE             3100 V6 and 3800 V6 Engines    2 93    LOS   o osr ey   koos S PA  i T    g  mE R MPGALMI  6 ALDAN ec L100kM    WW  a FUEL USED S OIL LIFE     Tuu OaD AVG ECON EB RANGE                3800 V6 Supercharged Engine    When you start the engine  the trip computer will display a mode  A lighted oval will appear to the left of the mode  currently being used     2 94    Control Buttons    The trip computer has three buttons that control its  functions     ENG MET  English Metric   Press this button to  change the display from English to metric units or  metric to English     RESET  Press this button for two seconds to reset the  mode displayed     MODE  Press this button to change the mode  being displayed     Functions    FUEL USED  Shows the total amount of fuel used  since you last reset this mode  The amount can be  displayed in gallons or liters     AVG ECON  Average Economy   Shows the average  fuel economy since you last reset this mode     OIL LIFE  Shows a percentage of the oil   s remaining  useful life  The system predicts remaining oil life using  data from length of drives  coolant temperature  engine  rpm and vehicle speed  Each time you get an oil change   be sure to reset this function so that it will give you an  accurate percentage  See    How to Reset the GM Oil Life  System       in the Index     RANGE  Shows how much f
205. nel  light comes on  press the OnStar Services button   An advisor can perform a check of the engine  on board computer and recommend what action  needs to be taken     OnStar MED NET  Med Net can store your  personal medical history and provide it to emergency  personnel if necessary   Requires activation and  additional fee      Accident Assist  An advisor can provide  step by step guidance following an accident     Remote Door Unlock  To contact the center  call  1 888 4 ONSTAR  You will be required to provide  your security information  An advisor will send a  command to your vehicle to unlock itself  The  advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle  Remote  Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is  parked to maintain the battery charge     Vehicle Locator Service  To contact the center  call  1 888 4 ONSTAR  You will be required to provide  your security information  An advisor will send a  command to your vehicle to sound the horn and or  flash the lamps     Route Support  An advisor can provide directions  or guidance to most places you want to go  In  addition  they can help you locate gas stations    rest areas  ATMs  hospitals  hotels  stores  eateries  and more     Ride Assist  An advisor can locate transportation in  the event that you are unable to drive     Concierge Services  The concierge advisor can  obtain tickets  reservations  or help with vacation trip  planning and other unique items and services     2 71    OnStar System Limitations    Complet
206. neuver     Not necessarily  Passing another vehicle on a two lane  highway is a potentially dangerous move  since the  passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming  traffic for several seconds  A miscalculation  an error in  judgment  or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can  suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the  worst of all traffic accidents    the head on collision        If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  pavement  recovery should be fairly easy  Ease off the  accelerator and then  if there is nothing in the way  steer  so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement   You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn  until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge  Then  turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway     So here are some tips for passing        Drive ahead     Look down the road  to the sides and  to crossroads for situations that might affect your  passing patterns  If you have any doubt whatsoever  about making a successful pass  wait for a better time     Watch for traffic signs  pavement markings and lines   If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a  turn or an intersection  delay your pass  A broken  center line usually indicates it   s all right to pass   providing the road ahead is clear   Never cross   a solid line on your side of the lane or a double   solid line  even if the road seems empty of  approaching traffic     4 15      Do not get too close to
207. ng on your vehicle  you is qualified to do so        The air bag system does not need regular maintenance     1 27    Rear Seat Passengers    It   s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up   Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear  seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are  wearing safety belts     Rear passengers who aren   t safety belted can be thrown  out of the vehicle in a crash  And they can strike others  in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts     Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions    ay                    1 28    Lap Shoulder Belt    The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder  belts  Here   s how to wear one properly        1  Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you   Don   t let it get twisted     The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across  you very quickly  If this happens  let the belt go back  slightly to unlock it  Then pull the belt across you  more slowly     2  Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks   Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure     When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way  it  will lock  If it does  let it go back all the way and  start again  If the belt is not long enough  see    Safety  Belt Extender    at the end of this section  Make sure  the release button on the buckle is positioned so you  would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if  you ever had to        3  To make the lap part tight  pull down on the buckle
208. ng or chipping the paint  on the vehicle while removing it     4  Turn the front sidemarker bulb socket a quarter turn  counterclockwise to remove     6 43    10          Remove the old bulb from the socket       Place the new bulb into the socket       Turn the bulb socket a quarter turn clockwise to    reinstall it       Carefully reinstall the headlamp assembly     Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint  on the vehicle       Reinstall the two bolts on the top of the    headlamp assembly   Close the hood     1  Open the trunk        2  Reach through the access opening in the trunk and  remove the slotted vent by squeezing the ends and  pulling down     1  Open the trunk     2  Unhook the convenience net  if equipped  and  remove it        3  Remove old the bulb by turning it a quarter  turn counterclockwise     4  Place the new bulb into the bulb socket        5  Turn the bulb a quarter turn clockwise  Reinstall  the vent   6  Close the trunk  3  Unscrew the upper convenience net    hook attachment     4  Pull the trunk trim carpeting away from the rear of  the trunk     5  Remove the upper trunk trim hook and the  two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp        6  Carefully remove the taillamp assembly  Be careful 7  Turn the lamp socket a quarter turn counterclockwise  to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on to remove   the vehicle     8  Remove the old bulb   9  Place the new bulb into the socket     10  Turn the lamp socket a quarter turn clockwise to 
209. ngerous  Your brakes will have to    do all the work of slowing down  They could get so  hot that they wouldn   t work well  You would then  have poor braking or even none going down a hill   You could crash  Always have your engine running  and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill          Know how to go uphill  You may want to shift down  to a lower gear  The lower gears help cool your engine  and transaxle  and you can climb the hill better        Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane  roads in hills or mountains  Don   t swing wide or cut  across the center of the road  Drive at speeds that let  you stay in your own lane  Here are some tips for winter driving     e As you go over the top of a hill  be alert  There could be    Have your vehicle in good shape for winter   something in your lane  like a stalled car or an accident          You may want to put winter emergency supplies in    You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of your trunk    special problems  Examples are long grades  passing or   no passing zones  a falling rocks area or winding   roads  Be alert to these and take appropriate action     4 29       Include an ice scraper  a small brush or broom  a supply  of windshield washer fluid  a rag  some winter outer  clothing  a small shovel  a flashlight  a red cloth and a  couple of reflective warning triangles  And  if you will  be driving under severe conditions  include a small bag  of sand  a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap 
210. ngine has started  turn the key to OFF  and  remove the key     4  Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN  within five seconds of removing the original key     5  The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has  been programmed  It may not be apparent that the  SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the  key is programmed     6  Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are  to be programmed     2 31    If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes New Vehicle       Break In        on and stays on  you will be able to restart your engine    if you turn it off  Your PASS Key III system  however   is not working properly and must be serviced by your NOTICE   dealer  Your vehicle is not protected by the    PASS Key III system at this time  Your vehicle doesn   t need an elaborate    If you lose or damage your PASS Key III key  see your    break in     But it will perform better in the long  dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key III to run if you follow these guidelines     have a new key made    Don   t drive at any one speed    fast or    slow    for the first 500 miles  805 km    Don   t make full throttle starts    Avoid making hard stops for the first  200 miles  322 km  or so  During this time  your new brake linings aren   t yet broken  in  Hard stops with new linings can mean  premature wear and earlier replacement   Follow this breaking in guideline every  time you get new brake linings    Don   t tow a trailer during break in    See   
211. not work well in  this player     While the tape is playing  use the VOL  FADE  BAL   BASS and TREBLE controls just as you do for the  radio  The display will show an arrow to show which  side of the tape is playing  When the down indicator  arrow is lit  selections listed on the bottom side of the  cassette are playing  When the up arrow is lit  selections  listed on the top side of the cassette are playing  The  tape player automatically begins playing the other side  when it reaches the end of the tape     If an error appears on the display  see    Cassette Tape  Messages    later in this section     1 PREV  Previous   Press this pushbutton or the SEEK  down arrow to search for the previous selection on the  tape  Your tape must have at least three seconds of  silence between each selection for previous or seek to  work  Press PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop  searching  The tape direction arrow blinks and the sound  will mute during previous or seek operation     2 NEXT  Press this pushbutton or the SEEK up arrow to  search for the next selection on the tape  If you hold the  pushbutton  the player will continue moving forward  through the tape  Your tape must have at least three  seconds of silence between each selection for next or  seek to work  Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to stop  searching  The tape direction arrow blinks and the sound  will mute during next or seek operation     3 PROG  Program   Press this pushbutton to play the  other side of the tape     4
212. nsportation arrangements  will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel     Canadian Vehicles  For warranty repairs during the  Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General  Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty   alternative transportation may be available under the  Courtesy Transportation Program  Please consult your  dealer for details     General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify   change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any  time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility  pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein  at its sole discretion     Warranty Information    Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet  that contains detailed warranty information     8 10    REPORTING SAFETY  DEFECTS TO THE UNITED  STATES GOVERNMENT    If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which  could cause a crash or could cause injury or death    you should immediately inform the National Highway  Traffic Safety Administration  NHTSA   in addition to  notifying General Motors     If NHTSA receives similar complaints  it may open an  investigation  and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  a group of vehicles  it may order a recall and remedy  campaign  However  NHTSA cannot become involved  in individual problems between you  your dealer or  General Motors     To contact NHTSA  you may either call the Auto Safety  Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393  or 366 0123 in  the Washington  D C  area  or write to     NHTS
213. nts occur within 25 miles  40 km   of home  And the greatest number of serious  injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than  40 mph  65 km h      Safety belts are for everyone     How to Wear Safety Belts Properly    Adults    This part is only for people of adult size     Be aware that there are special things to know about safety  belts and children  And there are different rules for smaller  children and babies  If a child will be riding in your  vehicle  see the part of this manual called    Children      Follow those rules for everyone   s protection     First  you    ll want to know which restraint systems your  vehicle has     We    ll start with the driver position     Driver Position    This part describes the driver   s restraint system     Lap Shoulder Belt    The driver has a lap shoulder belt  Here   s how to  wear it properly     1  Close and lock the door     2  Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight  To see  how  see    Seats    in the Index          Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you   Don   t let it get twisted     The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across  you very quickly  If this happens  let the belt go back  slightly to unlock it  Then pull the belt across you  more slowly     1 13    4  Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks     Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure   If the belt isn   t long enough  see    Safety Belt  Extender    at the end of this section     Make sure the release 
214. o OFF and put the MALL PGM fuse  back into the instrument panel fuse block     Delayed Illumination and Exit Lighting    With delayed illumination  the interior lamps will stay  on for about 25 seconds after all doors are closed     With exit lighting  the interior lamps will come on and  stay on for about 25 seconds whenever you remove the  key from the ignition     Programmable Modes    Mode 1  Both Features Off     The interior lamps will  turn on or off at the same instant that a door is opened  or closed     Mode 2  Delayed Illumination Only     The interior  lamps will stay on for about 25 seconds after all the  doors are closed  or until you lock the doors        Mode 3  Exit Lighting Only     The interior lamps will  come on whenever you remove the key from the ignition  and stay on for about 25 seconds  or until you lock   the doors     Mode 4  Both Features On     This combines  Modes 2 and 3     2 15    Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory  it was  programmed to Mode 4  The mode to which your  vehicle was programmed may have been changed since  it left the factory  To determine the mode to which your  vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a  different mode  do the following     1  Follow the instructions for    Entering Programming  Mode    listed previously     2  Turn the interior lamps thumbwheel all the way to  the right and then back slightly to the left     3  Count the number of chimes you hear  The number  of chimes tells you which
215. o a safe  sound level before your hearing adapts to it     To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following   e  Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting       Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably  and clearly     NOTICE     Before you add any sound equipment to your  vehicle    like a tape player  CB radio  mobile  telephone or two way radio    be sure you can  add what you want  If you can  it   s very  important to do it properly  Added sound  equipment may interfere with the operation of  your vehicle   s engine  Delphi Electronics radio or  other systems  and even damage them  Your  vehicle   s systems may interfere with the  operation of sound equipment that has been  added improperly    So  before adding sound equipment  check with  your dealer and be sure to check federal rules  covering mobile radio and telephone units        3 19    Care of Your Cassette Tape Player    A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause  reduced sound quality  ruined cassettes or a damaged  mechanism  Cassette tapes should be stored in their  cases away from contaminants  direct sunlight and  extreme heat  If they aren   t  they may not operate  properly or may cause failure of the tape player     Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every  50 hours of use  Your radio may display CLN to indicate  that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without  resetting the tape clean timer  If this message appears on  the display  your cassette tap
216. o be no leak  with the engine on  check to    see if the electric engine cooling fans are running  If the  engine is overheating  both fans should be running  If  they aren   t  your vehicle needs service     NOTICE     Engine damage from running your engine    without coolant isn   t covered by your warranty   See    Overheated Engine Protection Operating  Mode    in the Index        5 16       NOTICE     When adding coolant  it is important that you use  only DEX COOL    silicate free  coolant    If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the  system  premature engine  heater core or  radiator corrosion may result  In addition  the  engine coolant will require change sooner    at  30 000 miles  50 000 km  or 24 months   whichever occurs first  Damage caused by the use  of coolant other than DEX COOL   is not  covered by your new vehicle warranty        How to Add Coolant to the Coolant  Recovery Tank    If you haven   t found a problem yet  but the coolant level  isn   t at the COLD mark  add a 50 50 mixture of clean   drinkable water and DEX COOL   engine coolant at the  coolant recovery tank  See    Engine Coolant    in the  Index for more information     Adding only plain water to your cooling system  can be dangerous  Plain water  or some other  liquid such as alcohol  can boil before the proper  coolant mixture will  Your vehicle   s coolant  warning system is set for the proper coolant  mixture  With plain water or the wrong mixture   your engine could get too hot but
217. o free your vehicle when it is stuck  you will  need to spin the wheels  but you don   t want to spin  your wheels too fast  The method known as    rocking     can help you get out when you   re stuck  but you must  use caution     If you let your tires spin at high speed  they can  explode  and you or others could be injured  And   the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can    overheat  That could cause an engine  compartment fire or other damage  When you   re  stuck  spin the wheels as little as possible  Don   t  spin the wheels above 35 mph  55 km h  as shown  on the speedometer     5 38       NOTICE     Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your  vehicle as well as the tires  If you spin the wheels  too fast while shifting your transaxle back and  forth  you can destroy your transaxle        For information about using tire chains on your vehicle   see    Tire Chains    in the Index     Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out    First  turn your steering wheel left and right  That will  clear the area around your front wheels  If your vehicle  has traction control  you should turn the system off  See     Traction Control System    in the Index  Then shift back  and forth between REVERSE  R  and a forward gear   spinning the wheels as little as possible  Release the  accelerator pedal while you shift  and press lightly on  the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear  By  slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse  directions  you will cause a rock
218. ocal General Motors Business Unit     Mexico  Central America and Caribbean  Islands Countries  Except Puerto Rico and  U S  Virgin Islands     General Motors de Mexico  S  de R L  de C V   Customer Assistance Center   Paseo de la Reforma   2740   Col  Lomas de Bezares   C P  11910  Mexico  D F     01 800 508 0000  Long Distance  011 52   53 29 0 800    8 5    GM Mobility Program for Persons  with Disabilities    This program  available to  qualified applicants  can  reimburse you up to  1 000  toward aftermarket driver  or passenger adaptive  equipment you may require  for your vehicle  hand  controls  wheelchair scooter  lifts  etc       This program can also provide you with free resource  information  such as area driver assessment centers and  mobility equipment installers  The program is available  for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle  purchase lease  See your dealer for more details or call  the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935   Text telephone  TTY  users  call 1 800 833 9935     GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program    Call 1 800 GM DRIVE  463 7483  for details    When calling from outside Canada  please dial  1 905 644 3063  All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830     8 6       Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program                   Security While You Travel    1 800 ROADSIDE  1 800 762 3743     As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle  you are  automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside  Assistance program  This value added service
219. oing up steep hills  you may have to step on the  accelerator pedal to maintain your speed  When going  downhill  you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear  to keep your speed down  Of course  applying the brake  takes you out of cruise control  Many drivers find this to  be too much trouble and don   t use cruise control on  steep hills     Ending Cruise Control  There are two ways to turn off the cruise control      Step lightly on the brake pedal       or move the cruise switch to OFF     Erasing Cruise Speed Memory    When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition  or  shift into PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N   the cruise  control set speed memory is erased     Exterior Lamps             The exterior lamp control is located on the lower  left side of the instrument panel  to the left of the  steering wheel     The exterior lamp has three positions     OFF  Turning the control to this position  turns off all  lamps  except the Daytime Running Lamps  DRL      PS  Parking Lamps   Turning the control to  this position turns on the parking lamps  together  with the following       Sidemarker Lamps     Taillamps      License Plate Lamp     Instrument Panel Lights    ZD  Headlamps   Turning the control to this position  turns on the headlamps  together with the previously  listed lamps and lights     A warning chime will sound if you open the driver   s  door when you turn the ignition switch to LOCK or  ACCESSORY with the lamps on     2 55    Daytime Running Lamps  DRL     
220. oking  new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered  whenever possible     6 63    Cleaning Aluminum Wheels  Chrome Plated Wheels  If Equipped     Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with  mild soap and water  Rinse with clean water  After  rinsing thoroughly  dry with a soft clean towel  A wax  may then be applied     The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted  surface of your vehicle  Don   t use strong soaps   chemicals  abrasive polishes  abrasive cleaners  cleaners  with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because  you could damage the surface  Do not use chrome polish  on aluminum wheels     Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels  but  avoid any painted surface of the wheel  and buff off  immediately after application     Don   t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash  that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes  These  brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels     6 64    Cleaning Tires    To clean your tires  use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner     NOTICE     When applying a tire dressing always take care to  wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted  surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle   Petroleum based products may damage the paint  finish and tires        Sheet Metal Damage    If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal  repair or replacement  make sure the body repair shop  applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or  replaced to restore corrosion protection     O
221. on the child restraint  If you   re using  a forward facing child restraint  you may find it  helpful to use your knee to push down on the child  restraint as you tighten the belt     6  Push and pull the child restraint in different  directions to be sure it is secure     To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle   s  safety belt  It will be ready to work for an adult or larger  child passenger        4  Buckle the belt  Make sure the release button is  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  safety belt quickly if you ever had to     1 47    Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Although a rear seat is a safer place  you can secure a       Front Seat Position forward facing child restraint in the right front seat   You    ll be using the lap shoulder belt  See the earlier   Ys part about the top strap if the child restraint has one     hy Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the    child restraint  Secure the child in the child restraint  when and as the instructions say        1  Because your vehicle has a right front passenger  7  air bag  always move the seat as far back as it will  go before securing a forward facing child restraint     Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag  Never See    Seats    in the Index     put a rear facing child restraint in this seat  Here   s why  2  Put the restraint on the seat     3  Pick up the latch plate  and run the lap and shoulder  portions of the vehicle   s safety belt through or  ar
222. on the regular  headlamp system when you need it        The fog lamps switch is located on the upper corner  of the instrument panel  to the left of the instrument  panel cluster     For this feature to work the exterior lamps control must  be on  To turn the fog lamps on  press the right side of  the fog lamp switch  A light will glow in the switch to  let you know that they are on  Press the left side of the  switch to turn the fog lamps off        This feature controls the brightness of the instrument  panel lights     The thumbwheel for this  feature is located on the  instrument panel  to the left  of the steering wheel     Turn the thumbwheel to the right to increase the  brightness of the instrument panel lights and to the  left to decrease the brightness  Turn the thumbwheel  completely to the left to turn them off     Courtesy Lamps    When a door is open  the courtesy lamps will  automatically come on  They make it easy for you to  enter and leave the vehicle at night  You can also turn  these lamps on by manually turning the interior lamps  thumbwheel all the way to the right     Illuminated Entry    The illuminated entry feature will light the interior of  the vehicle so that you can see the inside of the vehicle  before you enter at night  The interior lamps will come  on for 40 seconds when you unlock the doors using the  remote keyless entry transmitter  if equipped  and the  ignition is in LOCK or OFF  After 40 seconds have  elapsed  the interior lamps will sl
223. one  Store all these  in the proper place     After you    ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle   you    ll need to store the flat tire in the trunk  Use the  following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk           When storing a full size tire  you must use the extension  to help avoid wheel surface damage  Use the extension  and protector guide located in the foam holder  To store  a full size tire  place the tire in the trunk valve stem  facing down  with the protector guide placed through a  wheel bolt hole  Remove the protector and attach the  retainer securely  When putting the compact spare back  in the trunk  place the protector guide back in the foam  holder  Store the cover as far forward as possible     5 35       Storing the Spare Tire and Tools A  Retainer  ap B  Cover  C  Compact  SxS Spare Tire  Stori           B D  Nut  oring a jack  a tire or other equipment in the  passenger compartment of the vehicle could  amp S  E  Jack  cause injury  In a sudden stop or collision  loose C F  Wrench  equipment could strike someone  Store all these G  Lock Nut Tool  in the proper place   i ee p    8 E H  Foam Holder  I  Extension and    Protective Guide  J  Bolt Screw    Compact Spare Tire    F    O    4  w    The compact spare tire is for temporary use only   Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as  soon as you can  See    Compact Spare Tire    in the Index   See the storage instructions label on the trunk lid to  properly position your
224. one grease with a clean cloth  During very cold   damp weather more frequent application may be  required  See    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants     in the Index     7 16    Automatic Transaxle Check    Check the transaxle fluid level  add if needed  See     Automatic Transaxle Fluid    in the Index  A fluid  loss may indicate a problem  Check the system and  repair if needed     At Least Once a Year    Key Lock Cylinders Service    Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant  specified in Part D     Body Lubrication Service    Lubricate all hood hinges  hood latch assembly   secondary latch  pivots  spring anchor  release pawl   door hinges  rear compartment  glove box door  console  door and any folding seat hardware  Part D tells you  what to use  More frequent lubrication may be required  when exposed to a corrosive environment     Starter Switch Check Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control  System Check    When you are doing this check  the vehicle could  move suddenly  If it does  you or others could be  injured  Follow the steps below     When you are doing this check  the vehicle could  move suddenly  If it does  you or others could be  injured  Follow the steps below        1  Before you start  be sure you have enough room  around the vehicle  1  Before you start  be sure you have enough  room around the vehicle  It should be parked    2  Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular ona levelsurface     brake  See    Parking Brake    in the Index if
225. onyl  MMT    ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel  contains MMT  General Motors does not recommend the  use of such gasolines  Fuels containing MMT can reduce  the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission  control system may be affected  The malfunction indicator  lamp may turn on  If this occurs  return to your authorized  GM dealer for service     To provide cleaner air  all gasolines in the United States  are now required to contain additives that will help  prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming     allowing your emission control system to work properly     You should not have to add anything to your fuel   Gasolines containing oxygenates  such as ethers and  ethanol  and reformulated gasolines may be available in  your area to contribute to clean air  General Motors  recommends that you use these gasolines  particularly if  they comply with the specifications described earlier     NOTICE     Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that  contains methanol  Don   t use fuel containing    methanol  It can corrode metal parts in your  fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber  parts  That damage wouldn   t be covered under  your warranty        Fuels in Foreign Countries    If you plan on driving in another country outside the  United States or Canada  the proper fuel may be hard to  find  Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not  recommended in the previous text on fuel  Costly repairs  caused by use of improper f
226. oo much  fluid when you get new brake linings  You should add   or remove  brake fluid  as necessary  only when work is  done on the brake hydraulic system     If you have too much brake fluid  it can spill  on the engine  The fluid will burn if the engine    is hot enough  You or others could be burned   and your vehicle could be damaged  Add brake  fluid only when work is done on the brake  hydraulic system        When your brake fluid falls to a low level  your brake  warning light will come on  See    Brake System Warning  Light    in the Index     6 35    What to Add    When you do need brake fluid  use only DOT 3   brake fluid  Use new brake fluid from a sealed container  only  See    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    in   the Index     Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area  around the cap before removing it  This will help keep  dirt from entering the reservoir     With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake    system  your brakes may not work well  or they  may not even work at all  This could cause a  crash  Always use the proper brake fluid        6 36    NOTICE       Using the wrong fluid can badly damage  brake system parts  For example  just a few  drops of mineral based oil  such as engine  oil  in your brake system can damage brake  system parts so badly that they   ll have to be  replaced  Don   t let someone put in the  wrong kind of fluid    If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle   s  painted surfaces  the paint finish can be  damaged  
227. or more information about the  compact spare tire     5 27       Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and  remove it  Then remove the jack and wrench     5 28    The tools you   ll be using include the jack  A  extension  and protector guide  B  and the wheel wrench  C      Removing Wheel Covers and  Wheel Nut Caps       If there is a wheel cover   loosen the plastic nut caps  with the wheel wrench   They won   t come off  Then   using the flat end of the  wheel wrench  pry along the  edge of the cover until it  comes off     Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the  Spare Tire       1  Using the wheel wrench  loosen all the wheel nuts     Don   t remove them yet     2  Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the vehicle   Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the    spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well     5 29    Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is  dangerous  If the vehicle slips off the jack  you  could be badly injured or killed  Never get under  a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack     Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly  positioned can damage the vehicle and even  make the vehicle fall  To help avoid personal  injury and vehicle damage  be sure to fit the jack  lift head into the proper location before raising  the vehicle        5 30       For jacking at the vehicle   s front location  put the  jack lift head  C  about 6 inches  15 cm  from the  rear edge of the front wheel opening  B  or between  the two bolt
228. or one thing  If  you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the  way  you will engage the child restraint locking feature   If this happens  just let the belt go back all the way and  start again     Supplemental Restraint System  SRS     This part explains the Supplemental Restraint  System  SRS  or air bag system     Your vehicle has air bags    one air bag for the driver  and another air bag for the right front passenger     Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of  injury from the force of an inflating air bag  But these  air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and  comply with federal regulations     Here are the most important things to know about the air  bag system     You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if  you aren   t wearing your safety belt    even if you  have air bags  Wearing your safety belt during a  crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things  inside the vehicle or being ejected from it    Air bags are designed to work with safety belts   but don   t replace them  Air bags are designed   to work only in moderate to severe crashes  where the front of your vehicle hits something   They aren   t designed to inflate at all in   rollover  rear or low speed frontal crashes    or in many side crashes  And  for some  unrestrained occupants  air bags may provide  less protection in frontal crashes than more  forceful air bags have provided in the past   Everyone in your vehicle should wear a   safety belt pro
229. or the driver   s and passenger   s front  seatback is located on the outboard side of each front  seat cushion        Lift the lever to release the seatback  then move the  seatback to where you want it  Release the lever to  lock the seatback in place  Pull up on the lever  without pushing on the seatback and the seatback  will move forward     Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is  in motion can be dangerous  Even if you buckle  up  your safety belts can   t do their job when  you   re reclined like this     The shoulder belt can   t do its job because it  won   t be against your body  Instead  it will be   in front of you  In a crash you could go into it   receiving neck or other injuries    The lap belt can   t do its job either  In a crash the  belt could go up over your abdomen  The belt  forces would be there  not at your pelvic bones   This could cause serious internal injuries        But don   t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle For proper protection when the vehicle is in  is moving  motion  have the seatback upright  Then sit  well back in the seat and wear your safety    belt properly     Head Restraints       Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the  restraint is closest to the top of your head  This position  reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash     1 6    Seatback Latches  Two Door Models        On two door models  the front passenger seat is  designed to make it easy to get into and out of the   rear seat  Tilt
230. ore and  during drinking       The length of time it has taken the drinker to  consume the alcohol     According to the American Medical Association  a  180 1b   82 kg  person who drinks three 12 ounce    355 ml  bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a  BAC of about 0 06 percent  The person would reach the  same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce  120 ml  glasses  of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces   45 ml  of a liquor like whiskey  gin or vodka        It   s the amount of alcohol that counts  For example  if  the same person drank three double martinis  3 ounces  or 90 ml of liquor each  within an hour  the person   s  BAC would be close to 0 12 percent  A person who  consumes food just before or during drinking will have a  somewhat lower BAC level     There is a gender difference  too  Women generally have  a lower relative percentage of body water than men     4 4    Since alcohol is carried in body water  this means that   a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a  man of her same body weight when each has the same  number of drinks     The law in an increasing number of U S  states  and  throughout Canada  sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent   In some other countries  the limit is even lower  For  example  it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany   The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United  States is 0 04 percent     The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to   six drinks  in one hour   Of course  as we    ve se
231. ore time to stop  You stop over more distance   and your strongest bones take the forces  That   s why  safety belts make such good sense     1 11    Here Are Questions Many People Ask  About Safety Belts    and the Answers    Q   A    zr S    Won   t I be trapped in the vehicle after an  accident if I   m wearing a safety belt     You could be    whether you   re wearing a safety  belt or not  But you can unbuckle a safety belt   even if you   re upside down  And your chance of  being conscious during and after an accident  so  you can unbuckle and get out  is much greater   if you are belted     If my vehicle has air bags  why should I have to  wear safety belts     Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in  most of them in the future  But they are  supplemental systems only  so they work with  safety belts    not instead of them  Every air bag  system ever offered for sale has required the use of  safety belts  Even if you   re in a vehicle that has air  bags  you still have to buckle up to get the most  protection  That   s true not only in frontal collisions   but especially in side and other collisions     1 12    Q  If Pm a good driver  and I never drive far from    A    home  why should I wear safety belts     You may be an excellent driver  but if you   re in an  accident    even one that isn   t your fault    you  and your passengers can be hurt  Being a good  driver doesn   t protect you from things beyond your  control  such as bad drivers     Most accide
232. otorhome  The two most common types of  recreational vehicle towing are known as    dinghy  towing     towing your vehicle with all four wheels on  the ground  and    dolly towing     towing your vehicle  with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on  a device known as a    dolly         With the proper preparation and equipment  many  vehicles can be towed in these ways  See    Dinghy  Towing    and    Dolly Towing     following     Here are some important things to consider before you  do recreational vehicle towing       What   s the towing capacity of the towing  vehicle  Be sure you read the tow vehicle  manufacturer   s recommendations       How far will you tow  Some vehicles have  restrictions on how far and how long they can tow     4 34      Do you have the proper towing equipment  See your  dealer or trailering professional for additional advice  and equipment recommendations       Is your vehicle ready to be towed  Just as you would  prepare your vehicle for a long trip  you    11 want to  make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed  See     Before Leaving on a Long Trip    in the Index     Dinghy Towing    NOTICE     Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the  ground will damage drivetrain components        Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four  wheels on the ground  If your vehicle must be towed   you should use a dolly  See    Dolly Towing    later in this  section for more information     Dolly Towing       Your vehicle can be to
233. ound the restraint  The child restraint instructions  will show you how     A child in a rear facing child restraint can be If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child   s face  seriously injured or killed if the right front or neck  put it behind the child restraint     passenger   s air bag inflates  This is because the  back of the rear facing child restraint would be  very close to the inflating air bag  Always secure  a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat        1 48       4  Buckle the belt  Make sure the release button is 5  Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock   safety belt quickly if you ever had to        6  To tighten the belt  feed the shoulder belt back  into the retractor while you push down on the  child restraint  You may find it helpful to use  your knee to push down on the child restraint  as you tighten the belt     1 50    7  Push and pull the child restraint in different  directions to be sure it is secure     To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle   s  safety belt and let it go back all the way  The safety belt  will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult  or larger child passenger     Older Children Q  What is the proper way to wear safety belts     A  If possible  an older child should wear a  lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a  shoulder belt can provide  The shoulder belt should  not cross the fa
234. our dealer for more information on the system and  how to subscribe to OnStar  See    OnStar   System    in  the Index for more information about the services  OnStar provides     Power Outside Rearview Mirrors    The power mirror control is  located near the driver   s  window  on the armrest     Turn the control counterclockwise to adjust the left  mirror or clockwise to adjust the right mirror  Then  move the control in the direction you want the  mirror to go     2 63    Convex Outside Mirror    Your passenger   s side mirror is convex  A convex  mirror   s surface is curved so you can see more from the  driver   s seat     A convex mirror can make things  like other  vehicles  look farther away than they really are     If you cut too sharply into the right lane  you  could hit a vehicle on your right  Check your  inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before  changing lanes     Storage Compartments    Glove Box    Use your key to lock and unlock the glove box  To open   lift the right side of the latch     2 64       Overhead Console  If Equipped        The optional overhead console has reading lamps and  storage compartments  including one for your garage  door opener and one for sunglasses   These features are  explained on the following pages     Reading Lamps    To turn either reading lamp on or off  press the switch  next to it     Garage Door Opener    You can store your garage door opener in the rear  compartment of the overhead console  and operate it  from t
235. our foot is firmly on the  brake pedal  your vehicle could move very  rapidly  You could lose control and hit people or  objects  Don   t shift out of PARK  P  or  NEUTRAL  N  while your engine is racing     NOTICE     Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out  of PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N  with the engine  racing isn   t covered by your warranty     AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  D   This position is   for normal driving  If you need more power for passing    and you    re      Going less than 35 mph  55 km h   push your  accelerator pedal about halfway down        Going about 35 mph  55 km h  or more  push the  accelerator pedal all the way down     You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power     NOTICE     If the vehicle seems to start up rather slowly  or if  it seems not to shift gears as you go faster   something may be wrong with a transaxle system  sensor  If you drive very far that way  your  vehicle can be damaged  So  if this happens  have  your vehicle serviced right away  Until then  you  can use SECOND  2  when you are driving less  than 35 mph  55 km h  and AUTOMATIC  OVERDRIVE  D  for higher speeds     2 41    THIRD  3   This position is also used for normal SECOND  2   This position gives you more power but  driving  but it offers more power and lower fuel lower fuel economy  You can use SECOND  2  on hills   economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  D   It can help control your speed as you go down steep    Here are some times you might choose THIRD  3  mountain
236. outside air into  your vehicle  See    Comfort Controls    in  the Index    If you have air outlets on or under the  instrument panel  open them all the way     See    Engine Exhaust    in the Index           Trunk Lock    To unlock the trunk from the outside  insert the key and  turn it clockwise  You can also press the trunk symbol  on the remote keyless entry transmitter  if equipped      Remote Trunk Release    This feature is used to unlock the trunk from inside  the vehicle     Press the TRUNK button  located behind the glove  box door     The shift lever must be in PARK  P  for the remote  trunk release button to work     2 25    Trunk Release Handle    NOTICE     The trunk release handle was not designed to be    used to tie down the trunk lid or as an anchor  point when securing items in the trunk  Improper  use of the trunk release handle could damage it           2 26    There is a glow in the dark trunk release handle located  inside the trunk on the latch  This handle will glow  following exposure to light  Pull the release handle to  open the trunk from the inside     Trap Resistant Trunk Kit    To help prevent a child from becoming trapped in your  trunk  you can order a trap resistant trunk kit from your  dealer  This kit includes        a modified trunk latch     alighted release handle  and      seatback tethers  for vehicles with folding  rear seatbacks      See your dealer for additional information     Theft    Vehicle theft is big business  especially in
237. oving engine parts  If you don   t  it could  be damaged     How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged  in  The answer depends on the outside temperature  the  kind of oil you have  and some other things  Instead of  trying to list everything here  we ask that you contact  your dealer in the area where you   ll be parking your  vehicle  The dealer can give you the best advice for  that particular area        Automatic Transaxle Operation          The automatic transaxle has a shift lever on the console  between the seats  There is also a display of the gear    positions on the instrument panel cluster near the  speedometer and tachometer     Maximum engine speed is limited when your vehicle is  in PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N  to protect driveline    components from improper operation     2 39    There are several different positions for the shift lever     PARK  P   This position locks the front wheels  It   s the  best position to use when you start the engine because  the vehicle can   t move easily     It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the  shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with the  parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll   Don   t leave your vehicle when the engine is  running unless you have to  If you have left the    engine running  the vehicle can move suddenly   You or others could be injured  To be sure your  vehicle won   t move  even when you   re on fairly  level ground  always set your parking brake and  move the shift lever to PARK 
238. owly fade out  The  lamps will fade out before 40 seconds have elapsed if  you do the following       Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry  transmitter  if equipped      Lock the doors using the power door lock switch     When any door is opened  illuminated entry is canceled   The interior lamps will stay on while any door is opened  and slowly fade out when all doors are closed  The  interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all  doors have been closed if they have not been locked   See    Delayed Illumination    later in this section     2 58    Delayed Illumination    The delayed illumination feature will continue to light  the interior of the vehicle for 25 seconds after all the  doors have been closed so that you can find the ignition  and buckle the seat belt at night  Delayed illumination  will not occur while the ignition is in RUN or  ACCESSORY  After 25 seconds have elapsed  the  interior lamps will slowly fade out  The lamps will fade  out before the 25 seconds have elapsed if you do any of  the following       Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY       Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry  transmitter  if equipped        Lock the doors using the power door lock switch     To turn delayed illumination feature off or on  see     Locks and Lighting Choices    in the Index     Delayed Exit Lighting    For exiting the vehicle at night  the vehicle is equipped  with the delayed exit lighting feature  The interior lamps  will illuminate fo
239. perly    whether or not there   s   an air bag for that person        1 21    Air bags inflate with great force  faster than  the blink of an eye  If you   re too close to an  inflating air bag  as you would be if you were    leaning forward  it could seriously injure you   Safety belts help keep you in position before and  during a crash  Always wear your safety belt   even with air bags  The driver should sit as far  back as possible while still maintaining control  of the vehicle     1 22       Anyone who is up against  or very close to  any  air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured  or killed  Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer  the best protection for adults  but not for young    children and infants  Neither the vehicle   s safety  belt system nor its air bag system is designed  for them  Young children and infants need the  protection that a child restraint system can  provide  Always secure children properly in  your vehicle  To read how  see the part of this  manual called    Children            e  SRS AIR BAG re    United States Canada    There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument  panel  which shows SRS AIR BAG or the air  bag symbol     The system checks the air bag electrical system for  malfunctions  The light tells you if there is an electrical  problem  See    Air Bag Readiness Light    in the Index  for more information     How the Air Bag System Works       Where are the air bags     The driver   s air bag is in the middle of the stee
240. pment  check with your dealer  If you don   t   your engine might not perform properly     be drained much sooner  And the excessive heat  can damage your starter motor  Wait about   15 seconds between each try to help avoid  draining your battery or damaging your starter        2 36    Starting Your 3800 Series II Engine    1  With your foot off the accelerator pedal  turn your  ignition key to START  When the engine starts  let    go of the key  The idle speed will go down as your    engine gets warm     NOTICE     Holding your key in START for longer than  15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to    be drained much sooner  And the excessive heat  can damage your starter motor  Wait about   15 seconds between each try to help avoid  draining your battery or damaging your starter        2  If it doesn   t start within 10 seconds  hold your key  in START for about 10 seconds at a time until  your engine starts  Wait about 15 seconds between  each try       If your engine still won   t start  or starts but then    stops   it could be flooded with too much gasoline   Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to  the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in  START for about three seconds  If the vehicle starts  briefly but then stops again  do the same thing   This time keep the pedal down for five or   six seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the  engine  After waiting about 15 seconds  repeat the  normal starting procedure     NOTICE     Your engine is
241. pressure   Worn  old tires can cause accidents  If your  tread is badly worn  or if your tires have  been damaged  replace them     Poorly maintained and improperly used tires  are dangerous     Overloading your tires can cause    overheating as a result of too much friction   You could have an air out and a serious  accident  See    Loading Your Vehicle    in  the Index        CAUTION   Continued        6 49    Inflation    Tire Pressure    The Tire Loading Information label  which is on the  inside of the trunk lid  shows the correct inflation  pressures for your tires when they   re cold     Cold     means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three  hours or driven no more than 1 mile  1 6 km      NOTICE     Don   t let anyone tell you that underinflation or  overinflation is all right  It   s not  If your tires  don   t have enough air  underinflation   you can  get the following     Too much flexing  Too much heat  Tire overloading  Bad wear   Bad handling  Bad fuel economy    NOTICE   Continued     6 50       NOTICE   Continued     If your tires have too much air  overinflation    you can get the following       Unusual wear      Bad handling     Rough ride     Needless damage from road hazards       When to Check  Check your tires once a month or more     Don   t forget your compact spare tire  It should be  at 60 psi  420 kPa      How to Check    Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire  pressure  You can   t tell if your tires are properly inflated  si
242. ps     Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle  clean    inside and out  Glare at night is made much  worse by dirt on the glass  Even the inside of the glass  can build up a film caused by dust  Dirty glass makes  lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would   making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly     Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a  roadway when you are in a turn or curve  Keep your  eyes moving  that way  it   s easier to pick out dimly  lighted objects  Just as your headlamps should be  checked regularly for proper aim  so should your eyes  be examined regularly  Some drivers suffer from night  blindness    the inability to see in dim light    and  aren   t even aware of it     4 19    Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads    Wai Heh AL  Nh   Y  My ip    A       Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble  On a wet  road  you can   t stop  accelerate or turn as well because  your tire to road traction isn   t as good as on dry roads   And  if your tires don   t have much tread left  you   ll get  even less traction  It   s always wise to go slower and be  cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving  The  surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are  tuned for driving on dry pavement     The heavier the rain  the harder it is to see  Even if your  windshield wiper blades are in good shape  a heavy rain  can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals   pavement markings  the edge of the road and ev
243. pward to raise the temperature  Slide the lever  downward to lower the temperature     Passenger   s Temperature Lever    The lever on the right adjusts the air temperature on the  passenger   s side of the vehicle only  The driver   s side  has its own lever for temperature control  Slide the lever  upward to raise the temperature  Slide the lever  downward to lower the temperature     Mode Knob    The knob on the right side of the climate control panel  has several settings to adjust the direction of the airflow       gt  o   M MAX  Maximum   This setting recirculates much  of the air inside your vehicle and sends it through   the instrument panel outlets  The air conditioning  compressor will run automatically in this setting unless  the outside temperature is below 38  F  3 3  C      Even when the compressor is running  you can control  the temperature        gt  o  rs  Vent   This setting brings in outside air and directs  it through the instrument panel outlets       gt  o  Vad  Bi Level   This setting brings in outside air and  directs it two ways  Half of the air is directed through  the vent outlets  Most of the remaining air is directed  through the floor ducts and a small amount to the defrost  and side window vents     e  Vad  Floor   This setting sends most of the air through  the ducts near the floor  The remaining airflow comes  out of the defroster and side window vents     We   Vad  Defogger   This setting allows half of the air to  go to the floor ducts and 
244. r   the following  See    Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts    in    the Index     5  To reinstall the cover  position the tabs through the  slots on the housing  A notch on the sides of the  filter cover will indicate the correct placement   Reinstall the two clips on the top of the engine air  cleaner filter housing when you are finished     Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to  replace the air filter     See    Scheduled Maintenance Services    in the Index        6 20    Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter  off can cause you or others to be burned  The air  cleaner not only cleans the air  it stops flame if  the engine backfires  If it isn   t there  and the  engine backfires  you could be burned  Don   t  drive with it off  and be careful working on the  engine with the air cleaner filter off     NOTICE     If the air cleaner filter is off  a backfire can   cause a damaging engine fire  And  dirt can easily  get into your engine  which will damage it   Always have the air cleaner filter in place when  you   re driving           Supercharger Oil    The supercharger engine  oil fill plug is located in  the engine compartment  on the front of the  supercharger  on   the passenger side of  the vehicle     Unless you are technically qualified and have the proper  tools  you should let your dealer or a qualified service  center perform this maintenance     When to Check    Check oil level every 30 000 miles  50 000 km  or every  36 months  whi
245. r  However  your engine oil and filter must be  changed at least once a year and at this time the system  must be reset  It is also important to check your oil  regularly and keep it at the proper level     If the system is ever reset accidentally  you must change  your oil at 3 000 miles  5 000 km  since your last oil  change  Remember to reset the oil life system whenever  the oil is changed     How to Reset the GM Oil Life System       The GM Oil Life System    calculates when to change  your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use  Anytime  your oil is changed  reset the system so it can calculate  when the next oil change is required  If a situation  occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE  OIL SOON light being turned on  reset the system     To reset the GM Oil Life System    after the oil has been  changed  use one of the following two procedures     Using the Driver Information Center  DIC   1  With the ignition key in RUN but the engine off     fully push and release the accelerator pedal slowly  three times within five seconds     2  If the CHANGE OIL SOON light flashes  the system  is resetting    3  Turn the key to OFF after the light stops flashing   then start the vehicle    If the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes back on  the   engine oil life monitor has not reset  Repeat the procedure    Using the Trip Computer  If Equipped    1  Press the MODE button until the light appears lit  next to OIL LIFE     2  Press and hold the RESET button for three secon
246. r other moving engine parts can injure you  Using a match near a battery can cause battery badly  Keep your hands away from moving parts  gas to explode  People have been hurt doing this  once the engine is running   and some have been blinded  Use a flashlight if  you need more light         5  Check that the jumper cables don   t have loose or  missing insulation  If they do  you could get a shock   The vehicles could be damaged too     Be sure the battery has enough water  You don   t  need to add water to the ACDelco   battery  installed in every new GM vehicle  But if a battery  has filler caps  be sure the right amount of fluid is  there  If it is low  add water to take care of that    first  If you don   t  explosive gas could be present   CAUTION   Continued        Before you connect the cables  here are some basic  things you should know  Positive     will go to  positive     or to a remote positive     terminal if the  vehicle has one  Negative will go to a heavy  unpainted  metal engine part or to a remote negative     terminal  if the vehicle has one     Don   t connect positive     to negative      or you ll  get a short that would damage the battery and maybe  other parts  too  And don   t connect the negative      cable to the negative     terminal on the dead battery  because this can cause sparks       Connect the red positive     cable to the positive      terminal location on the vehicle with the dead  battery  Use a remote positive     terminal if the  veh
247. r the band is turned  upward  the longer the delay between wiper cycles     LOW  Turn the band to LOW for steady wiping at a  low speed     HIGH  Turn the band to HIGH for steady wiping at a  high speed     Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades  before using them  If they   re frozen to the windshield   carefully loosen or thaw them  If the blades do become  damaged  get new blades or blade inserts     Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers  A circuit  breaker will stop them until the motor cools  Clear away  snow or ice to prevent an overload     2 51    Windshield Washer    G7 PUSH  Press the paddle with the the word PUSH  and the washer symbol on it  located on top of the  multifunction lever  to spray washer fluid on the  windshield  The wipers will clear the windshield and  then either stop or return to the set speed     In freezing weather  don   t use your washer until    the windshield is warmed  Otherwise the washer  fluid can form ice on the windshield  blocking  your vision     Cruise Control    With cruise control  you can maintain a speed of about  25 mph  40 km h  or more without keeping your foot  on the accelerator  This can really help on long trips   Cruise control does not work at speeds below  approximately 25 mph  40 km h      2 52       When you apply the brakes  the cruise control shuts off       Cruise control can be dangerous where you  can   t drive safely at a steady speed  So   don   t use your cruise control on winding    roads or
248. r up to 25 seconds when you remove  the key from the ignition  After 25 seconds have  elapsed  the interior lamps will slowly fade out  The  lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds have elapsed  if you do any of the following       Insert the key and turn the ignition to RUN  or ACCESSORY       Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry  transmitter  if equipped         Lock the doors using the power door lock switch     When any door is opened  delayed exit lighting is  canceled  The interior lamps will stay on while any door  is opened and will slowly fade out when all the doors  are closed  The interior lamps may stay on for up to   25 seconds after all the doors have been closed if they  have not been locked  See    Delayed Illumination     earlier in this section     To turn the delayed exit lighting feature off or on  see     Locks and Lighting Choices    in the Index     Overhead Console Reading Lamps  Option     These lamps are part of the overhead console  They will  go on when you open the doors  When the doors are  closed  push the button next to each lamp to turn   them on and off  The console also contains an open  storage bin     Front Reading Lamps  Option     If the vehicle has the optional sunroof  you will have  reading lamps in front of the sunroof switch located on  the headliner  These lamps will come on when you open  the doors  The lamps can be turned on and off manually  by pressing the button behind each reading lamp when  the doors are closed   
249. r vehicle     If a transmitter is lost or stolen  a replacement can be  purchased through your dealer  Remember to bring any  remaining transmitters with you when you go to your  dealer  When the dealer matches the replacement  transmitter to your vehicle  any remaining transmitters  must also be matched  Once your dealer has coded the  new transmitter  the lost transmitter will not unlock your  vehicle  Each vehicle can have a maximum of four  transmitters matched to it     2 12    Battery Replacement    Under normal use  the battery in your remote keyless  entry transmitter should last about three years     You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won   t  work at the normal range in any location  If you have to  get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works   it   s probably time to change the battery     NOTICE     When replacing the battery  use care not to  touch any of the circuitry  Static from your  body transferred to these surfaces may damage  the transmitter        To replace the battery do the following     1  Insert a flat object like a coin into the slot on the side  of the transmitter and twist to separate the halves     2  Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter  Do not  use the metal flanges to    pop out     the battery     3  Put the new battery into the transmitter as shown on  the transmitter  Use a type CR2032 battery  or  equivalent type     4  Reassemble the transmitter  Make sure the halves are  snapped together tightly so w
250. radio and begin playing     This override routine will remain active until EJECT  is pressed     AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc  Player  Option        Playing the Radio  POWER  Push this knob to turn the system on and off     VOL  Volume   Turn the knob clockwise to increase  volume  Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume     RECALL  Press this button to display the time with the  ignition on or off  When the radio is playing  press this  button to display the station frequency     3 10    Finding a Station  AM FM  Press this button to switch between AM  FM1  and FM2  The display shows your selection     TUNE  Press this knob lightly so it extends  Turn it to  choose radio stations  Press the knob back into its stored  position when you    re not using it     A SEEK V  Press the up or down arrow to go to the  next or previous station and stay there   Setting Preset Stations    The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to  your favorite stations  You can set up to 18 stations   six AM  six FM1 and six FM2  by performing the  following steps     1  Turn the radio on    2  Press AM FM to select the band   3  Tune in the desired station   4      Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons  until SET appears on the display  Whenever you  press that numbered pushbutton  the station you set  will return     5  Repeat the steps for each pushbutton     Setting the Tone  Bass Treble     BASS  Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or  decrease bass     TREBLE  S
251. red light will turn on  to let you know the system is arming  After all doors are  closed and locked  the red light will begin flashing at a  very slow rate to let you know the system is armed     Arming Confirmation    If the remote unlock confirmation is on   see    Locks  and Lighting Choices    in the Index   the headlamps   will flash briefly to let you know when the alarm system  has armed     Disarming with the Remote Keyless  Entry Transmitter    The alarm system will disarm when you use your remote  keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors  The red  light will go off to let you know the system is disarmed     Disarming with the Key    The alarm system will disarm when you use the key to  unlock the doors  The red light will stop flashing when  the system is disarmed  If you would like the key to  disarm the alarm system  see    Locks and Lighting  Choices    in the Index     2 29    PASS Key   IN    Your vehicle is equipped  with the PASS Key III   Personalized Automotive  Security System   theft deterrent system   PASS Key III is a passive  theft deterrent system  This  means you don   t have to do  anything different to arm or  disarm the system  It works  when you insert or remove  the key from the ignition        Your PASS Key III system operates on a radio  frequency subject to Federal Communications  Commission  FCC  Rules and with Industry Canada     This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules   Operation is subject to the following two conditions 
252. res and  controls for your vehicle  In this manual  you    ll find  that pictures and words work together to explain   things quickly     Safety Warnings and Symbols    You will find a number of safety cautions in this book   We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you  about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore  the warning     These mean there is something that could hurt  you or other people        In the caution area  we tell you what the hazard is   Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce  the hazard  Please read these cautions  If you don   t   you or others could be hurt     You will also find a circle  with a slash through it in  this book  This safety  symbol means    Don   t         Don   t do this    or    Don   t  let this happen        iii    Vehicle Damage Warnings    Also  in this book you will find these notices     NOTICE     These mean there is something that could damage  your vehicle     In the notice area  we tell you about something that can  damage your vehicle  Many times  this damage would  not be covered by your warranty  and it could be costly   But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid   the damage     When you read other manuals  you might see  CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different  colors or in different words     You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle   They use the same words  CAUTION or NOTICE     iv       Vehicle Symbols    Your vehicle may be equipped with components and  labels that use symbo
253. right away     If the air bag readiness light stays on after you  start your vehicle  it means the air bag system  may not be working properly  The air bags in    your vehicle may not inflate in a crash  or they  could even inflate without a crash  To help avoid  injury to yourself or others  have your vehicle  serviced right away if the air bag readiness light  stays on after you start your vehicle        The air bag readiness light should flash for a few  seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the  light doesn   t come on then  have it fixed so it will be  ready to warn you if there is a problem     2 79    Charging System Indicator Light    The charging system  light will come on briefly  when you turn on the  ignition  as a check to  show you it   s working   Then it will go out        If it stays on  or comes on while you are driving  you    may have a problem with the electrical charging system     It could indicate that you have a loose drive belt or  another electrical problem  Have it checked right away   Driving while this light is on could drain your battery     If you must drive a short distance with the light on  be  certain to turn off all your accessories  such as the radio  and air conditioner     2 80    Brake System Warning Light    Your vehicle   s hydraulic brake system is divided into  two parts  If one part isn   t working  the other part can  still work and stop you  For good braking  though  you  need both parts working well     If the warnin
254. riginal manufacturer replacement parts will provide  the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty     Finish Damage    Any stone chips  fractures or deep scratches in the finish  should be repaired right away  Bare metal will corrode  quickly and may develop into a major repair expense     Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up  materials available from your dealer or other service  outlets  Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected  in your dealer   s body and paint shop     Underbody Maintenance    Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  control can collect on the underbody  If these are   not removed  accelerated corrosion  rust  can occur on  the underbody parts such as fuel lines  frame  floor  pan and exhaust system even though they have  corrosion protection     At least every spring  flush these materials from the  underbody with plain water  Clean any areas where mud  and other debris can collect  Dirt packed in closed areas  of the frame should be loosened before being flushed   Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do  this for you     Chemical Paint Spotting    Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a  chemical fallout  Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  attack painted surfaces on your vehicle  This damage  can take two forms  blotchy  ringlet shaped  discolorations  and small irregular dark spots etched  into the paint surface     Although no defect in the paint job causes this  Pontiac  will
255. ring wheel     1 23    If something is between an occupant and an air  bag  the bag might not inflate properly or it might  force the object into that person causing severe  injury or even death  The path of an inflating    air bag must be kept clear  Don   t put anything  between an occupant and an air bag  and don   t  attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or  on or near any other air bag covering        The right front passenger   s air bag is in the instrument  panel on the passenger   s side     1 24    When should an air bag inflate     An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe  frontal or near frontal crash  The air bag will inflate  only if the impact speed is above the system   s designed     threshold level     If your vehicle goes straight into a  wall that doesn   t move or deform  the threshold level is  about 12 to 18 mph  19 to 29 km h   The threshold level  can vary  however  with specific vehicle design  so that  it can be somewhat above or below this range  If your  vehicle strikes something that will move or deform   such as a parked car  the threshold level will be higher   The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers  rear  impacts  or in many side impacts because inflation  would not help the occupant     In any particular crash  no one can say whether an  air bag should have inflated simply because of the  damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair  costs were  Inflation is determined by the angle of  the impact 
256. rmine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly  installed  This would allow fuel to evaporate into the  atmosphere  See    Malfunction Indicator Lamp    in   the Index     NOTICE     If you need a new fuel cap  be sure to get the  right type  Your dealer can get one for you  If you  get the wrong type  it may not fit properly  This  may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to  light and may damage your fuel tank and  emissions system  See    Malfunction Indicator  Lamp    in the Index        Filling a Portable Fuel Container    Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in  your vehicle  Static electricity discharge from the  container can ignite the gasoline vapor  You can  be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this  occurs  To help avoid injury to you and others        Dispense gasoline only into  approved containers       Do not fill a container while it is inside a  vehicle  in a vehicle   s trunk  pickup bed or  on any surface other than the ground   Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the  inside of the fill opening before operating  the nozzle  Contact should be maintained  until the filling is complete      Don   t smoke while pumping gasoline     Checking Things Under the Hood    An electric fan under the hood can start up and  injure you even when the engine is not running   Keep hands  clothing and tools away from any  underhood electric fan     Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and  start a fire  These include liquids like gasoline
257. ront  passenger   s air bag inflates  This is because the  back of the rear facing child restraint would be    very close to the inflating air bag  Always secure  a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat    You may secure a forward facing child restraint  in the right front seat  but before you do  always  move the front passenger seat as far back as it  will go  It   s better to secure the child restraint in  a rear seat     1 42       Wherever you install it  be sure to secure the child  restraint properly     Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  people in the vehicle  Be sure to properly secure any  child restraint in your vehicle    even when no child  is in it     Top Strap    Some child restraints have a top strap  or    top tether      It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision   For it to work  a top strap must be properly anchored  to the vehicle  Some top strap equipped child restraints  are designed for use with or without the top strap being  anchored  Others require the top strap always to be  anchored  Be sure to read and follow the instructions  for your child restraint  If yours requires that the top  strap be anchored  don   t use the restraint unless it is  anchored properly     If the child restraint does not have a top strap  one  can be obtained  in kit form  for many child restraints   Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a  kit is available        In
258. rs are doing and pay attention to  traffic signals     Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving       Know the best way to get to where you are  going  Get a city map and plan your trip into an  unknown part of the city just as you would for a  cross country trip       Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most  large cities  Yov    ll save time and energy  See the  next part     Freeway Driving           Treat a green light as a warning signal  A traffic  light is there because the corner is busy enough to  need it  When a light turns green  and just before  you start to move  check both ways for vehicles that  have not cleared the intersection or may be running  the red light        4 24    Freeway Driving       Mile for mile  freeways  also called thruways  parkways   expressways  turnpikes or superhighways  are the safest  of all roads  But they have their own special rules     The most important advice on freeway driving is  Keep  up with traffic and keep to the right  Drive at the same  speed most of the other drivers are driving  Too fast or  too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow  Treat the  left lane on a freeway as a passing lane     At the entrance  there is usually a ramp that leads to the  freeway  If you have a clear view of the freeway as you  drive along the entrance ramp  you should begin to  check traffic  Try to determine where you expect to  blend with the flow  Try to merge into the gap at close  to the prevailing speed  Swit
259. rument panel fuse block  An electrical overload  will cause the lamps to go on and off  or in some cases  to remain off  If this happens  have your headlamp  system checked right away     Windshield Wipers    The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit  breaker and a fuse  If the motor overheats due to heavy  snow  etc   the wiper will stop until the motor cools    If the overload is caused by some electrical problem   have it fixed     Power Windows and Other Power Options    Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power  windows and other power accessories  When the current  load is too heavy  the circuit breaker opens and closes   protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed     Fuses and Circuit Breakers    The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from  short circuits by a combination of fuses  circuit breakers  and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself  This  greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by   electrical problems     Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse  If the  band is broken or melted  replace the fuse  Be sure you  replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size  and rating  Spare fuses are located in the instrument  panel  See    Underhood Fuse Block    in the Index     Instrument Panel Fuse Block       Some fuses are in a fuse block located inside of the  glove box behind a small bin on the right side  To open   pull the cover out  The fuse block is inside  On the back  edge of this cover is a fuse p
260. rvice appointment and advising your  service consultant of your transportation needs  your  dealer can help minimize your inconvenience  If your  vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department  immediately  keep driving it until it can be scheduled for  service  unless  of course  the problem is safety related   If it is  please call your dealership  let them know this   and ask for instructions     If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle  off for service  you are urged to do so as early in the  work day as possible to allow for same day repair     Transportation Options    Warranty service can generally be completed while you  wait  However  if you are unable to wait Pontiac helps  minimize your inconvenience by providing several  transportation options  Depending on the circumstances   your dealer can offer you one of the following     Shuttle Service    Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle  service to get you to your destination with minimal  interruption of your daily schedule  This includes a  one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles  from the dealership     Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement    If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs   reimbursement up to  30 per day  five days maximum   may be available for the use of public transportation  such as taxi or bus  In addition  should you arrange  transportation through a friend or relative  reimbursement  for reasonable fuel expenses up to  10 per day
261. s  4 1 L   3800 V6  Code K                4 3 quarts  4 1 L   3800 V6 Supercharged  Code 1     4 3 quarts  4 1 L   Fuel Tank              17 5 U S  gallons  66 2 L   Wheel Nut Torque            100 ft lb  140 N m     All capacities are approximate  When adding fluid  be  sure to fill to the appropriate level  as recommended in  this manual  Recheck fluid level after filling  See     Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    in the Index  for more information     3100 V6  Code J  Engine Specifications    VYPCO ine sees topes RSE he SARE eh BOSS V6  Displacement                 191 CID 3 1L LG8   Firing Order                    0 0  1 2 3 4 5 6  3800 V6  Code K  Engine Specifications   TYPE icq ceeae core ee he ok RG eed ees NEES V6  Displacement                 231 CID  3 8L L36   Firing Order                    0 0  1 6 5 4 3 2    3800 V6 Supercharged  Code 1   Engine Specifications    Type sng Sheng ha beeen dead obs ae deed set V6  Displacement                 231 CID  3 8L L67   Firing Order 2  6 cc cases sce ee vee 1 6 5 4 3 2    Air Conditioning Refrigerant  Capacity   If you do your own service work  you   ll need the proper  service manual  See    Doing Your Own Service Work    in  the Index for additional information  It is recommended    that service work on your air conditioning system be  performed by a qualified technician     Air Conditioning  Refrigerant R 134a             2 25 Ibs   1 09 kg     Use Refrigerant Oil  R134a Systems     6 75    Normal Maintenance Replac
262. s  A  as shown     Put the compact spare tire near you        For jacking at the vehicle   s rear location  put the jack 3   lift head  B  about 5 5 inches  14 cm  from the front   edge of the rear wheel opening  C  or just behind the  off set  A  as shown     Put the compact spare tire near you     Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle  clockwise  Raise the vehicle far enough off the  ground for the spare tire to fit underneath the wheel  well  Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire     5 31    4  Remove any rust or dirt  from the wheel bolts   mounting surfaces and    spare wheel     Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts  If you    do  the nuts might come loose  Your wheel could  fall off  causing a serious accident        5  Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface        6  Reinstall the wheel nuts  with the rounded end of  the nuts toward the  wheel  Tighten each nut  by hand until the wheel    Rust or dirt on the wheel  or on the parts to is held against the hub     which it is fastened  can make the wheel nuts  become loose after a time  The wheel could come  off and cause an accident  When you change a    wheel  remove any rust or dirt from the places  where the wheel attaches to the vehicle  In an  emergency  you can use a cloth or a paper towel  to do this  but be sure to use a scraper or wire  brush later  if you need to  to get all the rust or  dirt off        5 32    8  Tighten the wheel nuts    1 firmly in a crisscross  sequence as shown
263. s you   re about to turn  change lanes  or stop     When towing a trailer  the arrows on your instrument  panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer  are burned out  Thus  you may think drivers behind you  are seeing your signal when they are not  It   s important  to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are  still working     Your vehicle has bulb warning lights  When you plug a  trailer lighting system into your vehicle   s lighting  system  its bulb warning lights may not let you know if  one of your lamps goes out  So  when you have a trailer  lighting system plugged in  be sure to check your  vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure  they    re all working  Once you disconnect the trailer  lamps  the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one  of your vehicle lamps is out     Driving On Grades    Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start  down a long or steep downgrade  If you don   t shift  down  you might have to use your brakes so much that  they would get hot and no longer work well     On a long uphill grade  shift down and reduce your  speed to around 45 mph  70 km h  to reduce the  possibility of engine and transaxle overheating     If you have overdrive  you may have to drive in    THIRD  3  instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  D      Parking on Hills    You really should not park your vehicle  with a    trailer attached  on a hill  If something goes  wrong  your rig could start to move  People can  be injured
264. sed locking feature makes it more  convenient for you to use your power door locks to lock  all the doors when leaving your vehicle  When a door is  open  three chimes will sound the first time you attempt  to lock the doors using the power door lock switch or  the keyless entry transmitter  if equipped   The chimes  indicate that the last door closed locking is being used   All doors can be opened for five seconds from the time  the last door has been closed  Five seconds after the last  door is closed  all doors will lock  You can lock the  doors immediately by using the power door lock switch  or the remote keyless entry transmitter  if equipped      The last door closed locking feature will activate when  the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY     To turn the last door closed locking feature on or off  see     Locks and Lighting Choices    in the Index     Automatic Door Locks    All of the doors will lock automatically when you move  your shift lever out of PARK  P   All doors will unlock  automatically when the ignition is turned off while the  shift lever is in PARK  P   If you prefer to have your  doors unlocked automatically at any time  see    Locks  and Lighting Choices    in the Index     If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle after the  doors have been automatically locked  place the shift  lever into PARK  P   Unlock all doors using the power  door lock switch or unlock the door you want using the  inside manual lever  If you have programmed the  Automati
265. service                                         If you haven   t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed  previously and  therefore  haven   t changed your automatic transaxle fluid   change both the fluid and filter     150 000 Miles  240 000 km   Drain  flush and refill cooling system  or every 60 months since last service    whichever occurs first   See    Engine Coolant    in the Index for what to use  MILEAGE   Inspect hoses  Clean radiator  condenser  pressure cap and neck  PF   Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap    An Emission Control Service                       SERVICED BY     7 14    Part B  Owner Checks and Services    Listed in this part are owner checks and services which  should be performed at the intervals specified to help  ensure the safety  dependability and emission control  performance of your vehicle     Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once   Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your  vehicle  make sure they are the proper ones  as shown  in Part D     At Each Fuel Fill    It is important for you or a service station attendant to  perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill     Engine Oil Level Check    Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil  if necessary  See    Engine Oil    in the Index for  further details     Engine Coolant Level Check    Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL    coolant mixture if necessary  See    Engine Coolant    in  the Index for further details 
266. so have a  pull down armrest that contains an open storage bin and  two cupholders     2 65    Trunk Access Panel  If Equipped     If the vehicle has rear seat armrests  you will also have a  trunk access panel        This feature allows items in the trunk to pass through  the rear seat  To use the trunk access panel  pull the rear  armrest down  unlock the access panel with the ignition  key and pull it down     2 66    Convenience Net  If Equipped     The vehicle may have a convenience net  You   ll see it  on the back wall of the trunk     Put small loads  like grocery bags  in the net  It can help  keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick  starts and stops     The net isn   t for larger  heavier loads  Store them in the  trunk as far forward as you can     You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when  you   re not using it     Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter    The center front ashtray is on the instrument panel  To    open it  pull at the bottom of the ashtray until it is fully   7   ne  open  To remove the ashtray cup  lift the tabs on the Don   t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand    sides and pull out  On four door models an ashtray is while it is heating  If you do  it won   t be able to  located on each of the rear doors  back away from the heating element when it   s    ready  That can make it overheat  damaging the  lighter and the heating element     NOTICE        NOTICE     Don   t put papers and other things that burn    Sun Visors 
267. stem  The module records information  about the readiness of the system  when the system  commands air bag inflation and driver   s safety belt  usage at deployment     Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag  system  Improper service can mean that your air  bag system won   t work properly  See your dealer  for service     Your dealer and the service manual have information  NOTICE  about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system   To purchase a service manual  see    Service and Owner    Publications    in the Index     If you damage the covering for the driver   s or the  right front passenger   s air bag  the bag may not    work properly  You may have to replace the air  bag module in the steering wheel or both the air  bag module and the instrument panel for the  right front passenger   s air bag  Do not open or  break the air bag coverings     For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is  turned off and the battery is disconnected   an air bag can still inflate during improper       service  You can be injured if you are close to an    Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle air bag when it inflates  Avoid yellow connectors   Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced  They are probably part of the air bag system   There are parts of the air bag system in several places Be sure to follow proper service procedures   around your vehicle  You don   t want the system to and make sure the person performing work for    inflate while someone is worki
268. stem  The vehicle would be  considered not ready for inspection  This can happen if  you have recently replaced your battery or if your  battery has run down  The diagnostic system is designed  to evaluate critical emission control systems during  normal driving  This may take several days of routine  driving  If you have done this and your vehicle still does  not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system  readiness  see your dealer or qualified service center to  prepare the vehicle for inspection     2 87    Oil Pressure Light    gaia    kPa    United States Canada    If you have a problem with your oil pressure  this light  may stay on after you start your engine  or come on  when you are driving     This indicates that oil is not going through your engine  quickly enough to keep it lubricated  The engine could  be low on oil or could have some other oil problem   Have it fixed right away     The oil light could also come on in two other situations       When the ignition is on but the engine is not running   the light will come on as a test to show you it   s  working  The light will go out when you turn the  ignition to RUN  If it doesn   t come on with the  ignition on  you may have a problem with the fuse or  bulb  Have it fixed right away     2 88       If you make a hard stop  the light may come on for a  moment  This is normal     Don   t keep driving if the oil pressure is low  If  you do  your engine can become so hot that it  catches fire  You or others could be
269. sting motion  This will unlock the seat  Slide the seat  to where you want it and release the lever  Try to move  the seat back and forth to make sure the seat is locked  in place        If your vehicle has this  feature  the control is  located on the outboard side  of the driver   s seat cushion     To adjust the seat cushion  do any of the following     Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the  control toward the front or the rear     Raise or lower the seat cushion by sliding the control  up or down     Raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion  by sliding the front of the control up or down     Raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion by  sliding the rear of the control up or down        If your vehicle has this option  there will be a control  located on the outboard side of the driver   s seat cushion   in front of the reclining seatback lever  To increase or  decrease lumbar support  push the control forward or  rearward  To adjust the lumbar support up or down  push  the control up or down     Heated Driver   s Seat  Option     If your vehicle has this  option  the heated seat  switch is located on the  center console  behind the  open storage bin        Press LO to warm the seat to a lower temperature   Press HI to warm the seat to a higher temperature    To turn this feature off  place the switch in the center  position  This feature only works when the ignition is  turned on     1 4    Reclining Front Seatbacks    The recliner lever f
270. switch     This feature cannot guarantee that you   ll never be  locked out of your vehicle  If you don   t leave the keys in  the ignition  or if you use the manual door lock  you  could still lock your keys inside your vehicle  Always  remember to take your keys with you     To turn this feature on or off  see    Locks and Lighting  Choices    in the Index   Leaving Your Vehicle    If you are leaving the vehicle  take your keys  open your  door and set the locks from inside  Then get out and  close the door     Remote Keyless Entry System   If Equipped     If your vehicle has this feature  you can lock and unlock  your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet  1 m   up to 30 feet  9 m  away using the remote keyless entry  transmitter supplied with your vehicle     Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency  subject to Federal Communications Commission  FCC   Rules and with Industry Canada     This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules   Operation is subject to the following two conditions    1  this device may not cause harmful interference   and  2  this device must accept any interference  received  including interference that may cause  undesired operation     This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada     Operation is subject to the following two conditions    1  this device may not cause interference  and  2  this  device must accept any interference received  including  interference that may cause undesired operation of   the device 
271. switch to control the sunroof is  located in the headliner on the roof panel  The switch  works only when the ignition is on or RAP is active   See    Retained Accessory Power  RAP     in the Index     Push the rear of the switch once and the sunroof will  open to the vent position only  You will need to open the  sunshade by hand     Push the rear of the switch a second time and the  sunroof will open the remainder of the way by itself   This is the express open feature     To close the sunroof  push and hold the front of the  switch until the sunroof motor stops  The sunshade must  be closed by hand     2 73    The Instrument Panel    Your Information System       The main components of the instrument panel are the following       Side Window Defogger Vents    Fog Lamp Switch     Multifunction Lever     Instrument Panel Cluster     Hazard Warning Button    Horn    Qa   m ON WwW  gt       Trip Computer  If Equipped  and or Driver  Information Center  DIC       Instrument Panel Vents    POmMmOZZrAS      o    Interior Lamps Control    Exterior Lamps Control      Tilt Steering Wheel Control     Audio Steering Controls  If Equipped      Head Up Display  HUD  Controls  Option     Comfort Controls     Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter    Audio System      Glove Box      Instrument Panel Fuse Block    2 75    Instrument Panel Cluster    Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running  You   ll know  how fast you   re going  about how mu
272. t is centered on your shoulder  The belt should be  away from your face and neck  but not falling off  your shoulder     1 15    Q  What   s wrong with this           You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is    too loose  In a crash  you would move forward  too much  which could increase injury  The  shoulder belt should fit against your body        OOF      E    P     A  al F A    SQ                                   The shoulder belt is too loose  It won   t give nearly  as much protection this way     1 16    Q  What   s wrong with this        You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled  in the wrong place like this  In a crash  the belt       would go up over your abdomen  The belt forces  would be there  not at the pelvic bones  This could  cause serious internal injuries  Always buckle your  belt into the buckle nearest you                              The belt is buckled in the wrong place     1 17    Q  What   s wrong with this                                       The shoulder belt is worn under the arm  It should  be worn over the shoulder at all times     1 18    You can be seriously injured if you wear the  shoulder belt under your arm  In a crash  your  body would move too far forward  which would  increase the chance of head and neck injury   Also  the belt would apply too much force to the  ribs  which aren   t as strong as shoulder bones   You could also severely injure internal organs  like your liver or spleen     Q  What   s wrong with th
273. t panel   toward the center of the vehicle  near the windshield   will flash slowly when the system is armed     2 28    While armed  the doors will not unlock with the power  door lock switch  The alarm will sound if someone  tampers with the trunk lock  enters the vehicle  without  using the remote keyless entry transmitter or key to  unlock the doors   or turns the ignition on  The horn will  sound and the headlamps will flash for up to two  minutes  The system will also cut off the fuel supply   preventing the vehicle from being driven     Arming with the Power Lock Switch    Your alarm system can be programmed to arm when you  use either power lock switch to lock the doors while any  door is open and the key is removed from the ignition   If you would like to arm the system with the power lock  switch see    Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting  Choices    in the Index  When programmed  the red light  will flash quickly to let you know that the system is  ready to arm with the power lock switches  When you  press the rear of a power door lock switch  the red light  will stop flashing and stay on to let you know that the  system is arming  After all the doors are closed and  locked  the red light will begin flashing at a very slow  rate to let you know the system is armed     Arming with the Remote Keyless  Entry Transmitter    The alarm system will arm when you use the remote  keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors after the key  is removed from the ignition  The 
274. tape  it could be one of  the following       E10  The tape is tight and the player can   t turn the  tape hubs  Remove the tape  Hold the tape with the  open end down and try to turn the right hub  counterclockwise with a pencil  Turn the tape over  and repeat  If the hubs do not turn easily  your tape  may be damaged and should not be used in the  player  Try a new tape to make sure your player is  working properly       Ell  The tape is broken  Try a new tape     E14  Wrapped tape  Try a new tape     CLN  Clean   If this message appears on the display   the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned  It will still  play tapes  but you should clean it as soon as possible to  prevent damage to the tapes and player  See    Care of  Your Cassette Tape Player    in the Index     If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can   t be  corrected  contact your dealer  If your radio displays an  error number  write it down and provide it to your dealer  when reporting the problem     CD Adapter Kits    It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit  with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass  feature on your tape player     To activate the bypass feature  use the following steps   1  Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY   2  Turn the radio off     3  Press and hold TAPE PLAY for three seconds   The tape symbol on the display will flash for  two seconds  indicating the feature is active     4  Insert the adapter into the cassette slot  It will power  up the 
275. terrent system must be disarmed for the  engine to run and while in Mode 2  the key can no  longer disarm the system     If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar   system   OnStar will not be able to remotely unlock your vehicle  if it has been programmed to Mode 2     Mode 3  Standard Arming and Disarming       The content theft deterrent system will arm when  you lock the doors using either power door lock  switch while any door is open and the key is  removed from the ignition        The content theft deterrent system will arm when  you lock the doors with your remote keyless entry  transmitter  The key must be removed from the  ignition when you lock the doors or the content  theft deterrent system will not arm        The content theft deterrent system will disarm when  you unlock the doors with the key or the remote  keyless entry transmitter     2 23    Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory  it was  programmed to Mode 1  The mode to which your  vehicle was programmed may have been changed since  it left the factory  To determine the mode to which your  vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a  different mode  do the following     1     2    Follow the instructions for    Entering Programming  Mode    listed previously     Insert a second ignition key fully into any door key  cylinder and turn it to the unlock position     This step is necessary to prevent accidental  programming of this feature to Mode 2  Do not  program this feature to Mode 2
276. the weights are  proper  If they aren   t  you may be able to get them right  simply by moving some items around in the trailer     Total Weight on Your Vehicle   s Tires    Be sure your vehicle   s tires are inflated to the upper  limit for cold tires  You   ll find these numbers on the  Tire Loading Information label  found on the inside  of the trunk lid  or see    Loading Your Vehicle    in  the Index  Then be sure you don   t go over the  GVW limit for your vehicle  including the weight  of the trailer tongue     Hitches    It   s important to have the correct hitch equipment   Crosswinds  large trucks going by and rough roads are  a few reasons why you   ll need the right hitch  Here are  some rules to follow       The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for  hitches  Do not attach rental hitches or other  bumper type hitches to it  Use only a frame mounted  hitch that does not attach to the bumper       Will you have to make any holes in the body of your  vehicle when you install a trailer hitch  If you do   then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove  the hitch  If you don   t seal them  deadly carbon  monoxide  CO  from your exhaust can get into your  vehicle  See    Carbon Monoxide    in the Index  Dirt  and water can  too     4 40             owy   _ij alIa    Safety Chains    You should always attach chains between your vehicle  and your trailer  Cross the safety chains under the tongue  of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road 
277. tion Control System  or if the system is off  then an  acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your  foot off the accelerator pedal     If your vehicle starts to slide  ease your foot off the  accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the  vehicle to go  If you start steering quickly enough  your  vehicle may straighten out  Always be ready for a  second skid if it occurs     Of course  traction is reduced when water  snow  ice   gravel or other material is on the road  For safety  you    ll  want to slow down and adjust your driving to these  conditions  It is important to slow down on slippery  surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and  vehicle control more limited     While driving on a surface with reduced traction  try  your best to avoid sudden steering  acceleration or  braking  including engine braking by shifting to a lower  gear   Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide   You may not realize the surface is slippery until your  vehicle is skidding  Learn to recognize warning   clues    such as enough water  ice or packed snow   on the road to make a    mirrored surface       and slow  down when you have any doubt     Remember  Any anti lock brake system  ABS  helps  avoid only the braking skid     4 17    Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving     Drive defensively       Don   t drink and drive        Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the  glare from headlamps behind you       Since you can   t see as
278. tion off  Or  if the light comes on and stays on  when you   re driving  stop as soon as possible and turn  the ignition off  Then start the engine again to reset the  system  If the light still stays on  or comes on again  while you   re driving  your vehicle needs service  If the  light is on and the regular brake system warning light  isn   t on  you still have brakes  but you don   t have  anti lock brakes     The anti lock brake system warning light should come  on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN  If the  light doesn   t come on then  have it fixed so it will be  ready to warn you if there is a problem     2 81    Traction Control System Warning Light   3800 Supercharged V6 Engine Only     The traction control   system warning light  TCS may come on for the   following reasons   OFF g       If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS  button located on the far right side of the trip  computer  the warning light will come on and  stay on  To turn the system back on  press the  button again  The warning light should go off   See    Traction Control System    in the Index  for more information     If there   s a brake system problem that is specifically  related to traction control  the traction control system  will turn off and the warning light will come on  If  your brakes begin to overheat  the traction control  system will turn off and the warning light will come    on until your brakes cool down     If the traction control system warning light comes o
279. tions  These positions allow you  to signal a turn or a lane change     To signal a turn  move the lever all the way up or down   When the turn is finished  the lever will return to its  original position automatically     An arrow on the instrument  panel cluster will flash   in the direction of the turn  or lane change     To signal a lane change  just raise or lower the lever  until the arrow starts to flash  Hold it there until you  complete your lane change  The lever will return to its  original position when you release it     As you signal a turn or a lane change  if the arrow  flashes faster than normal  a signal bulb may be burned  out and other drivers won   t see your turn signal     2 50    If a bulb is burned out  replace it to help avoid an  accident  If the arrows don   t go on at all when you  signal a turn  check for burned out bulbs and then check  the fuse  See    Fuses and Circuit Breakers    in the Index     A chime will sound if you leave the turn signal on for  more than 3 4 mile  1 2 km      Headlamp High Low Beam Changer    To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam   or high to low  pull the multifunction lever all the way  toward you  Then release it     When the high beams   are on  this light on the  instrument panel cluster will  appear  While the high beam  headlamps are on  the fog  lamps will not illuminate     If your vehicle is equipped with the Head Up Display   HUD   an arrow will appear in the display area to  indicate that the h
280. tions for  Open the cap with the adding water   washer symbol on it  Don   t mix water with ready to use washer  Add washer fluid until the fluid  Water can cause the solution to freeze  tank is full  and damage your washer fluid tank and  other parts of the washer system  Also   water doesn   t clean as well as washer fluid   Fill your washer fluid tank only  three quarters full when it   s very cold  This  allows for expansion if freezing occurs   which could damage the tank if it is  completely full      Don   t use engine coolant  antifreeze  in  your windshield washer  It can damage  your washer system and paint     NOTICE        6 34    Brakes  Brake Fluid       Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver   s side  of the engine compartment  It is filled with DOT 3 brake  fluid  See    Engine Compartment Overview    in the Index     There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the  reservoir might go down  The first is that the brake fluid  goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake  lining wear  When new linings are put in  the fluid level    goes back up  The other reason is that fluid is leaking out  of the brake system  If it is  you should have your brake  system fixed  since a leak means that sooner or later your  brakes won   t work well  or won   t work at all     So  it isn   t a good idea to    top off    your brake fluid   Adding brake fluid won   t correct a leak  If you add fluid  when your linings are worn  then you ll have t
281. ttery or Remote Positive     Terminal    C  Dead Battery or Remote Positive     Terminal    5 10    To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles  do  the following     1  Disconnect the black negative     cable from the  vehicle that had the dead battery     2  Disconnect the black negative     cable from the  vehicle with the good battery     3  Disconnect the red positive     cable from vehicle  from the vehicle with the good battery     4  Disconnect the red positive     cable from the  other vehicle     5  Return the remote positive     terminal cover to its  original position     Towing Your Vehicle    Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if  you need to have your disabled vehicle towed  See     Roadside Assistance    in the Index  If you want to tow  your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational  purposes  such as behind a motorhome   see     Recreational Vehicle Towing    in the Index     Engine Overheating    You will find a coolant temperature gage and a warning  light concerning an overheated engine condition on the  instrument panel cluster  See    Engine Coolant  Temperature Gage    and    Engine Coolant Temperature  Light    in the Index  You also have a low coolant light on  your instrument panel cluster  See    Low Coolant Light     in the Index     Overheated Engine Protection  Operating Mode    This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle   to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation    If an overheated engine cond
282. uddenly pulls  out from nowhere  or a child darts out from between  parked cars and stops right in front of you  You can  avoid these problems by braking    if you can stop   in time  But sometimes you can   t  there isn   t room   That   s the time for evasive action    steering around   the problem     Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like  these  First apply your brakes  See    Braking in  Emergencies    earlier in this section  It is better to  remove as much speed as you can from a possible  collision  Then steer around the problem  to the left   or right depending on the space available     4 14       An emergency like this requires close attention and a  quick decision  If you are holding the steering wheel at  the recommended 9 and 3 o   clock positions  you can  turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing  either hand  But you have to act fast  steer quickly  and  just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have  avoided the object     The fact that such emergency situations are always  possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at  all times and wear safety belts properly     Off Road Recovery    You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the  edge of a road onto the shoulder while you   re driving     Passing    The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a  two lane highway waits for just the right moment   accelerates  moves around the vehicle ahead  then goes  back into the right lane again  A simple ma
283. uel wouldn   t be covered by  your warranty     To check on fuel availability  ask an auto club  or  contact a major oil company that does business in the  country where you ll be driving     Filling Your Tank The tethered fuel cap is behind the hinged fuel door on  the driver   s side of your vehicle     Gasoline vapor is highly flammable  It burns  violently  and that can cause very bad injuries   Don   t smoke if you   re near gasoline or refueling  your vehicle  Keep sparks  flames and smoking    materials away from gasoline        While refueling  let the fuel cap hang by the tether  below the fuel fill opening        To remove the fuel cap  turn it slowly to the left   counterclockwise   The fuel cap has a spring in it  if  you let go of the cap too soon  it will spring back to  the right     If you get gasoline on yourself and then  something ignites it  you could be badly burned   Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the    fuel cap too quickly  This spray can happen if  your tank is nearly full  and is more likely in hot  weather  Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for  any    hiss    noise to stop  Then unscrew the cap  all the way     Be careful not to spill gasoline  Clean gasoline from  painted surfaces as soon as possible  See    Cleaning the  Outside of Your Vehicle    in the Index        When you put the fuel cap back on  turn it to the right   clockwise  until you hear a clicking sound  Make sure  you fully install the cap  The diagnostic system can  dete
284. uller and a fuse usage chart   To use the fuse puller  place the wide end of the fuse  puller over the plastic end of the fuse  Squeeze the ends  over the fuse and pull it out     To reinstall the bin  position the lower end and turn  the top into position  Press on the sides until it snaps  into place     6 69    See Underhood Electrical Ee Description  a o  a e a owo   woo   PANK ae  ADEEOG MALL PGM Mall Module    Program  Cee e  mee fen  anon   MALL Mall Module  ee rene wee wr Wiper  STR Steering Wheel Illumination  mA O O l e  w  C ae a Blank  oo     mejo o   STR WHL CTRL Steering Wheel Control  oe ae       RADIO Radio  Circuit Breaker Description BLANK Blank  HEADLAMP Headlamps RADIO AMP Bose Amplifier  SEAT Power Seat  Power Lumbar PWR LOCK Mall Module    Power Locks  BLANK Blank HSEAT LUM Heated Seats  Power Lumbar  PWR WDO Power Windows R  DEFOG Rear Defog  BLANK Blank PASSKEY III PASS Key   MI Security System    6 70    Fuse   RAP  HAZARD  PWR MIR  HVAC HI  CIG LTR    INT LAMP  STOP LAMP  ONSTAR  BLANK  ECM  CRUISE  1 P IGN    SIR    TURN    Description   Retained Accessory Power  Hazard Flashers   Power Mirrors   HVAC Blower    Hi    Cigarette Lighter  ALDL  Floor  Console Accessory Outlet    Mall Module    Interior lamps  Stoplamp   OnStar   System   Blank   Electronic Control Module  Cruise Control    Chime Mall Module  Cluster   Trip Computer  Head Up  Display  Automatic Transaxle  Shift Lock Control    Supplemental Inflatable Restraint   Air Bag     Turn Signal 
285. ust have at least three seconds of silence between  each selection for SEEK to work  If a compact disc is  playing  press the up arrow to go to the start of the next  track  Press the down arrow to go to the start of the  current track if more than eight seconds have played  If  less than eight seconds have played  press the down  arrow to go to the previous track     A VOL  Volume      Press the up or down arrow to  increase or decrease volume     PLAY  Press this button to play a cassette tape or  compact disc when listening to the radio     MUTE  Press this button to silence the system  Press it  again  or any other radio button  to turn on the sound     Understanding Radio Reception    AM    The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM   especially at night  The longer range  however  can  cause stations to interfere with each other  AM can pick  up noise from things like storms and power lines  Try    reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it     FM Stereo    FM stereo will give you the best sound  but FM signals  will reach only about 10 to 40 miles  16 to 65 km   Tall  buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals  causing  the sound to come and go     Tips About Your Audio System    Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable  until it is too late  Your hearing can adapt to higher  volumes of sound  Sound that seems normal can be loud  and harmful to your hearing  Take precautions by  adjusting the volume control on your radio t
286. utton to play a CD when  listening to the radio      amp  EJECT  Press this button to stop a CD when it is  playing or to remove a CD when it is not playing  The  EJECT button will work with the radio off    Compact Disc Messages    E  Error   If this message and a number appears on the  radio display or if the disc comes out  it could be for one  of the following reasons       You   re driving on a very rough road     It   s very hot       The disc is upside down     It is dirty  scratched or wet     The air is very humid   If so  wait about an hour and  try again        Ifthe CD is not playing correctly  for any other  reason  try a known good CD     If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can   t be  corrected  contact your dealer  If your radio displays an  error number  write it down and provide it to your dealer  when reporting the problem     Theft Deterrent Feature    THEFTLOCK   is designed to discourage theft of your  radio  It works by using a secret code to disable all radio  functions whenever battery power is removed     The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or  ignored  If ignored  the system plays normally and the  radio is not protected by the feature  If THEFTLOCK is  activated  your radio will not operate if stolen     When THEFTLOCK is activated  the radio will display  LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery  power is removed  If your battery loses power for any  reason  you must unlock the radio with the secret code  before it 
287. ver   s  door when the ignition is in OFF  LOCK or  ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition     Retained Accessory Power  RAP     With Retained Accessory Power   RAP   the power  windows  audio system and sunroof will continue to  work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to  off and none of the doors are opened     Starting Your Engine    Move your shift lever to PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N    Your engine won   t start in any other position    that   s a  safety feature  To restart when you   re already moving    use NEUTRAL  N  only     2 34    NOTICE     Don   t try to shift to PARK  P  if your vehicle is  moving  If you do  you could damage the  transaxle  Shift to PARK  P  only when your  vehicle is stopped        Shift Lock Release    This vehicle is equipped with an electric shift lock  release system  The shift lock release is designed to  do the following       Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift  lever is in PARK  P   with the shift lever button  fully released         Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK  P   unless the ignition is in a position other than OFF or  LOCK  The shift lock release is always functional  except in the case of a dead or low voltage   less than 9 V  battery     If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low  voltage  there is an override access slot that will allow  you to override the shift lock release        The override access slot is located on the upper right  side of the console shift panel    
288. wed using a dolly  To tow your  vehicle using a dolly  follow these steps     1  Put the front wheels on the dolly    2  Put the vehicle in PARK  P     3  Set the parking brake and then remove the key   4      Clamp the steering wheel in a  straight ahead position     5  Release the parking brake     Loading Your Vehicle       ra N  GM TIRE LOADING INFORMATION    OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP   FRT  CTR  RR  TOTAL K L                                             MAX  LOADING   GVWR SAME AS  200             D TIRE PRESSURE                                  OT  ADD 28KPA 4PS     S MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION    Ne A             Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it  may properly carry  The Tire Loading Information label  is inside the trunk lid  The label tells you the proper size   speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for  the tires on your vehicle  It also gives you important  information about the number of people that can be in  your vehicle and the total weight you can carry  This  includes the weight of all occupants  cargo and all  nonfactory installed options     4 35                                                          MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP    DATE GVWR GAWR FRT  THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO AL g L  e OTOR  VEHICLE SAFETY  BUMPER  TI NTIONSTANDARDS IN  EFFECT ON THE DAG OF M WN ABOVE   200 ASS CAR   Ko J       The other label is the Certification label  found on the  rear edge of the driver   s door  It tells you the gross  weight capacity of your v
289. will operate     3 15    Activating the Theft Deterrent Feature    The instructions which follow explain how to enter your  secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system  It is  recommended that you read through all nine steps  before starting the procedure     If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between  any steps  the radio automatically reverts to time and  you must start the procedure over at Step 4     1  Write down any three or four digit number from  000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate  from the vehicle     2  Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN   3  Turn the radio off     4  Press the   and 4 pushbuttons at the same time  Hold  them down until     shows on the display  Next you  will use the secret code number which you have  written down     5  Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display     6  Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree  with your code     7  Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree  with your code     3 16    8  Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the  code matches the secret code you have written down   The display will show REP to let you know that you  need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your  secret code     9  Press AM FM and this time the display will show  SEC to let you know that your radio is secure     With the ignition off  the THEFTLOCK LED indicator  will flash  indicating a secured radio     Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a  Power Loss    Enter your secret code as follo
290. ws  pause no more than  15 seconds between steps     1  Turn the ignition on  LOC will appear on the display   2  Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display     3  Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree  with your code     4  Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree  with your code     5  Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the  code matches the secret code you have written down   The display will show SEC  indicating the radio is  now operable and secure     If you enter the wrong code eight times  INOP will  appear on the display  You will have to wait an hour  with the ignition on before you can try again  When  you try again  you will only have three more chances   eight tries per chance  to enter the correct code before  INOP appears     If you lose or forget your code  contact your dealer     Disabling the Theft Deterrent Feature    Enter your secret code as follows  pause no more than  15 seconds between steps     1  Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN   2  Turn the radio off     3  Press the   and 4 pushbuttons at the same time   Hold them down until SEC shows on the display     4  Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display     5  Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree  with your code     6  Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree  with your code     7  Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the  code matches the secret code you have written down   The display will show      indicating that the radio is  no lon
291. y transmitter to unlock the  vehicle or open the trunk  the headlamps will flash to  let you know when the command is received     Mode 3  Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sound      Remote Lock Confirmation  When you use the  remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the vehicle   the horn will sound briefly and the headlamps will  flash to let you know the command is received       Remote Unlock Confirmation  When you use the  remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the  vehicle or open the trunk  the headlamps will flash to  let you know the command is received     Mode 4  Exterior Lamps and Horn Sound     on second  LOCK press only       Remote Lock Confirmation  When you use the  remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the vehicle   the headlamps will flash to let you know the  command is received  The horn will sound briefly  and the headlamps will flash if you press the LOCK  button again within five seconds       Remote Unlock Confirmation  When you use the  remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the  vehicle or open the trunk  the headlamps will flash to  let you know the command is received     Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory  it was  programmed to Mode 4  The mode to which your  vehicle was programmed may have been changed since  it left the factory  To determine the mode to which your  vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a  different mode  do the following     1  Follow the instructions for    Entering Programming  Mode    list
292. you have the anti lock braking system  you    ll  want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry  pavement  See    Anti Lock    in the Index        Allow greater following distance on any  slippery road       Watch for slippery spots  The road might be fine  until you hit a spot that   s covered with ice  On an  otherwise clear road  ice patches may appear in  shaded areas where the sun can   t reach  around  clumps of trees  behind buildings or under bridges   Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may  remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear  If  you see a patch of ice ahead of you  brake before you  are on it  Try not to brake while you   re actually on  the ice  and avoid sudden steering maneuvers     4 31    If You   re Caught in a Blizzard    Tie ared cloth to your vehicle to alert police that  you    ve been stopped by the snow        Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you   If you have no blankets or extra clothing  make body  insulators from newspapers  burlap bags  rags  floor  mats    anything you can wrap around yourself or  tuck under your clothing to keep warm        If you are stopped by heavy snow  you could be in a  serious situation  You should probably stay with your  vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help  and you can hike through the snow  Here are some  things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your  passengers safe           Turn on your hazard flashers  You can run the engine to keep warm  but 
293. your  upper body  while sending slightly warmed air to your  lower body     Heating    On cold days select a fan setting and use floor with the  temperature levers all the way in the red area  The  system will bring in outside air  heat it and send it to the  floor ducts     If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater  you can use  it to help your system provide warm air faster when it   s  cold outside 0  F   18  C  or lower  An engine coolant  heater warms the coolant your engine and heating  system use to provide heat  See    Engine Coolant  Heater    in the Index     Ventilation    For mild outside temperatures when little heating  or cooling is needed  use a fan setting and vent with  the A C button off  to direct outside air through  your vehicle     Defogging and Defrosting    Your system has two settings for clearing the front and  side windows  To defrost the windows quickly  turn the  fan to a high setting and use defroster with the  temperature levers all the way in the red area  To   warm passengers while keeping the windows clear    use defogger     3 4       Rear Window Defogger    The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  remove fog from the rear window     The comfort control  system has a button to  operate your vehicle   s  rear window defogger   It is marked REAR     Press the button to turn the rear window defogger on or  off  When the rear window defogger is operating  an  indicator above this button will light  The rear warming  grid will turn of
294. ystem parts  If you see  anything that might keep a safety belt system from  doing its job  have it repaired     Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you  in a crash  They can rip apart under impact forces   If a belt is torn or frayed  get a new one right away     Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers   and have them repaired or replaced   The air bag  system does not need regular maintenance      1 54    Replacing Restraint System Parts  After a Crash    If you    ve had a crash  do you need new belts     After a very minor collision  nothing may be necessary   But if the belts were stretched  as they would be if worn  during a more severe crash  then you need new parts     If belts are cut or damaged  replace them  Collision  damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt  or seat parts repaired or replaced  New parts and repairs  may be necessary even if the belt wasn   t being used at  the time of the collision     If an air bag inflates  you    ll need to replace air bag  system parts  See the part on the air bag system  earlier in this section     y Section 2 Features and Controls       Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle  and information on starting   shifting and braking  Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is    working properly    and what to do if you have a problem     Windows   Keys   Door Locks   Remote Keyless Entry System  If Equippe
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
ONE INSTALLATION, LICENSING, AND    Vosstronics TransImp 185U3  User`s Manual (Hardware) IB(NA)-0800154-F  DeEsser User Manual    INSTRUCTION MANUAL - Black & Decker ServiceNet  Xerox 8550 Printer User Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file